JP7283600B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the first state to a second state that is more advantageous to the player . Among such conventional gaming machines, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which the state that is likely to be changed to the second state is continued until the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times.

JP 2012-147965 A

However, further enhancement of interest is required .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention executes a first determination based on a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. A possible first determination means, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means; a second determination means capable of executing a second determination that is advantageous to the player; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on display means; A privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when the identification information is stopped and displayed, a first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a game ball more than the first state. A variable means that can be varied between a second state in which it is easy to enter a ball, a first game state, and said variable so that a game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entering means than in the first game state. a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the means is variably controlled; and a performance can be started based on the dynamic display of the identification information during the second game state. and effect starting means, wherein the game state setting means includes first setting for setting the second game state after the privilege game is executed, and movement of the identification information during the second game state. and a second setting for setting the first game state when the end condition is established based on the target display, and the effect start means can execute the effect in which the end condition can be satisfied as the effect. An effect period including at least a dynamic display period corresponding to the dynamic display can be used to start an end suggestion effect for suggesting the end of the second game state, and the privilege game executing means can As a privilege game, one privilege game can be executed from a plurality of privilege games including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the gaming machine is capable of executing one privilege game. is a mode of the effect to be executed after the specific timing when the privilege game has the right to be executed at the specific timing during the period when the end-suggesting effect is being executed. It is possible to determine a mode different from the mode of the effect executed when the privilege game does not have the right to be executed, and the privilege game at a specific timing during the period in which the end-suggesting effect is being executed. does not have the right to be executed, and after that, if the privilege game has the right to be executed during the period in which the end-suggesting effect is being executed, the privilege game is executed at the specific timing It is possible to inform the player that the player has the right to execute the privilege game in a specific mode different from the mode of the performance determined when the player has the right to be played, and the mode of the performance. , it is possible to determine a mode that allows the player to grasp that the second privilege game has the right to be executed.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, and the first determination capable of executing the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means means, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and acquired by the acquiring means a storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the information thus obtained up to an upper limit; and means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the first determination by the first determination means or the result of the second determination by the second determination means. and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the result of the specific first determination or the result of the specific second determination by the dynamic display means. a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entering means; A variable means that can be varied between two states, a first game state, and the variable means is variably controlled so that a game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entering means than in the first game state. a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state to be played; a performance start means capable of starting a performance based on the dynamic display of the identification information during the second game state; and the game state setting means is based on a first setting for setting the second game state after the privilege game is executed and the dynamic display of the identification information during the second game state a second setting for setting the first game state when an end condition is satisfied; and the effect start means corresponds to the dynamic display in which the end condition is satisfied as the effect. It is possible to start an end suggestion effect for suggesting the end of the second game state using a performance period including at least a dynamic display period to be performed, and the privilege game execution means performs the second It is possible to execute one privilege game from among a plurality of privilege games including at least one privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the gaming machine is capable of executing the end . When the privilege game has the right to be executed at a specific timing during the period in which the suggestive effect is being executed, the privilege game is executed as a mode of the effect that is executed after the specific timing. It is possible to determine a mode different from the mode of the performance performed when the player does not have the right to obtain, and the privilege game can be performed at a specific timing during the period in which the performance suggesting termination is being performed. and then has the right to execute the privilege game during the period in which the end-suggesting effect is being executed, the privilege game has the right to be executed at the specific timing. It is possible to inform the player that the player has the right to execute the privilege game in a specific mode different from the mode of the performance determined when the performance mode is the second It is possible to determine the manner in which the player can be made to understand that he or she has the right to play the bonus game .

Therefore , there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing ball flow in the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing ball flow in the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the operational relationship between the storage device provided on the game board of the pachinko machine and the non-electric accessory. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the internal structure of the second variable winning device 650. FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting of the display screen in the third pattern display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the third pattern display device. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the small winning game of the small winning type B executed based on the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance, (b) is the first ball entrance It is a timing chart showing the flow of the small winning game of the small winning type A that is executed based on the entry of the ball into. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of a small winning game executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the ball entering the second ball entrance. It is a timing chart showing the flow of a jackpot game to be executed. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow in the first embodiment; FIG. It is a timing chart (first half) showing the relationship between the game state and the effect state in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart (second half) showing the relationship between the game state and the effect state in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the game state is a time saving state and the variation of the first special symbol is started, and (b) is a game It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the state is the time saving state and 40 seconds have passed since the first special symbol variation was started. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device after the game state is the time saving state and the ball enters the second ball entrance during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is the time saving state and the variation period of the first special symbol is one second remaining. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the variation of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state stops, and (b) is after the time saving state ends It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the normal state at the time point when the variation of the second special symbol is started. (a) is a normal state after the end of the time saving state, and is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the variation of the second special symbol won by the small hit is stopped and displayed, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when a big winning game is started based on the small winning game displayed in FIG. 18(a). (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the second jackpot game is started due to the time-saving variation executed after the jackpot game due to the V winning is finished, b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is the time saving state and the variation period of the first special symbol is 10 seconds remaining. (a) is the display of the third symbol display device when the game state is the time-saving state and the second special symbol is reserved and stored due to the ball entering the second ball entrance during the battle production. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram showing an example of a screen, and FIG. 11B is a diagram of the third symbol display device when the game state is a time-saving state and the ball does not enter the second ball entrance during the battle production; It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen. (a) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the game state is the time saving state and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired to the upper limit during the time saving fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (b) is a game state is a time-saving state, and during the time-saving fluctuation of the first special symbol, the privilege effect given by acquiring the second special symbol's reserved ball up to the upper limit is being executed. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of a 3rd pattern display apparatus. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is the normal state and a small winning game based on the first special symbol is executed; [Fig. 22] Fig. 22(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device during the small winning game shown in Fig. 22(a). (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when a right-handed game is played while the game state is a normal state (left-handed state); It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in a state in which the accessory is being opened. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the first embodiment It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first winning random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a special symbol 1 random number table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the first embodiment, (d) is the contents of the second per random number table in the first embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first winning type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a special symbol 1 jackpot selection table in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small per type selection table in the first embodiment, (b) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 small per selection table in the first embodiment (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 small per selection table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table in the first embodiment, (b) schematically shows the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table in the first embodiment (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern table in the first embodiment, (d) is a special figure in the first embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for 1 small per. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 time saving variation pattern table in the first embodiment, (b) is the contents of the special figure 2 variation pattern table in the first embodiment It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the. 2A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM within the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram showing. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an effect state selection table, and (b) is each effect state selected by the effect state selection table and the third symbol displayed on the third pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between 3 symbols and reserved symbols. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing normal fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows time reduction change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a small winning start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing an electric accessary product control process executed by an MPU in a main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the normal map prefetching process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small winning end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing electric accessary product opening/closing processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing storage device control processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing variation pattern related processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the pending|holding ball number related process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the normal figure fluctuation display setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation state setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing specific effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing counter update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing error command processing performed. 4 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 7 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, (b) is an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, (b) is an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the second embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the second embodiment It is a diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for special figures 1 time reduction in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving end distinction processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third pattern display device in the third embodiment, (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third pattern display device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the third embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the third embodiment It is a diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving state selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; It is a front view which shows the modification 1 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the modification 2 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing another example of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the modification of the electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the modification of the electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the modification of the electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the modification of the electric accessory. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in Other Example 1 of production, and (b) is an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in Other Example 1 of production. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the example 2 of other effects, and (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the example 2 of other effects. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure variation pattern table in other production example 2, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal variation pattern table in other production example 2. (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a variation pattern table for time saving A in other example 2 of production, and (d) is a variation for time saving B in other example 2 of production 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a pattern table; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in example 2 of other effects.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the non-electric accessory 710 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the second variable winning device 650 provided in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

The inner frame 12 has a large number of nails, a left first ball entrance 64a and a right first ball entrance 64b (hereinafter referred to as both the left first ball entrance 64a and the right first ball entrance 64b). is referred to as first ball entry 64.), second ball entry 640, through gate 67, variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), etc. game board 13 (Fig. 2) is detachably attached from the front side. A pinball game is performed by causing balls to flow down the front surface (game area) of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. A metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15. The front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 can be opened and closed by using the hinge 19 side as an opening/closing axis. A unit 15 is supported on the front side so that it can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. . On the right side of the lower tray unit 15, an operation handle 51 is provided to be operated by the player in order to hit the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. Inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is driven. a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the period of pressing, and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 detected by changes in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the player, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stopping switch 51b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. The main control device 110 or another control device detects the ball fired by the ball shooting unit 112a, or the solenoid of the ball shooting unit 112a It may be configured to detect that the ball has been shot. Alternatively, the number of detected spheres may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

A frame button 22 is provided on the upper portion of the lower tray unit 15 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed. By arranging the frame buttons 22 operable by the player on the pachinko machine 10 in this way, it becomes possible to arbitrarily select the performance to be executed by the pachinko machine 10, and the player's willingness to participate in the game is increased. can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is provided as an operation means that the player can operate. (or approach), a lever-type operation means that the player can operate in the left-right (or front-rear) direction, and a handle-type operation means that the player can rotate. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of operation means is one, but more than that may be provided, and a plurality of operation means with different operation methods may be provided. By configuring in this way, the player can perform a wider variety of operations, and the types of effects that are performed based on the player's operation on the operating means can be increased.

Further, the operating means (frame button 22) is arranged at a position (upper left side of the lower tray unit 15) that can be operated even while the player is playing the game (operating the operating handle 51 with the right hand). Therefore, the player can easily operate the frame button 22 even while playing the game.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general ball entrance 63, a 1st ball entrance 64, 2nd ball entrance 640, variable prize winning device (first variable prize winning device 65, second variable prize winning device 650), variable display device unit 80, etc. 12 is attached to the back side. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650), and the variable display device unit 80 are based on router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the plate 60 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a wood screw or the like. Also, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13, and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a starting port and the like are arranged and the shot ball is area). In addition, the game area includes all areas where the ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out hole 66 and the prize winning hole (entering ball hole).

In this pachinko machine 10, the left side of the variable display unit 80 (the left side when the game board 13 is viewed from the front) is formed as a left game area, and the right side is formed as a right game area. In the left-handed game), a game is performed in which the ball is entered into the general ball entrance 63 or the left first ball entrance 64a, and the ball is aimed at the right game area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). ), the shot ball passes above the variable display unit 80 and enters the right first ball entrance 64b, the second ball entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second A game aiming at the variable winning device 650 or the like is performed. The pachinko machine 10 configured in this way prevents the game from becoming monotonous by allowing the player to play a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) according to the game state.

In addition, although the details will be described later, according to various game states (normal state, time saving state, jackpot state, etc.) set in this pachinko machine 10, a game that is advantageous to the player (left-handed game or right-handed game) games) are configured differently. This allows the player to change the content of the game while grasping the current game state, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 is continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, an arc member 70 made of resin is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) lottery is conducted, and the ball enters the through gate (normal When passing through the ball entrance) 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is judged whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. When the special pattern jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific prize winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls win). until), and the opening is repeated the number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls enter the first specific prize-winning hole 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol lottery is used to determine a small win in which a privilege different from the special game state is awarded to the player in some cases when a non-big win (loss) is determined. is configured to When the special symbol lottery wins a small hit, the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 1.8 seconds in total or until 10 balls are won). A small winning game to be opened is executed. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, part of the balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a during the small winning game have passed through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 6)). In this case, the above-described big winning game is executed after the small winning game ends. As a result, the player can win a big win based on the results of a game aimed at winning a big win in a special symbol lottery and a small win game executed by winning a small win in a special symbol lottery. It is possible to perform both a game aimed at Therefore, the player can be allowed to play a variety of games, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with seven special symbol jackpot types, "jackpot A" to "jackpot G". The two types of "jackets A and B" are types of jackpots that can be determined when a jackpot is won in a lottery executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The two types of big wins C and D" are small wins in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the ball passes through a specific area during the small win game. The “jackpot E” is a jackpot type that can be determined by a ball entering the second ball entrance 640. A lottery executed when the ball enters the ball opening 640 results in a small win, and a big win type that can be determined when the ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, ``jackpot F, G''. is a type of jackpot that can be determined when a ball passes through a specific area during a small win game, which is a small win in a lottery executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. . The plurality of jackpot types provided in this way include benefits given to the player when the jackpot game is executed, such as benefits during the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds, opening time, opening operation pattern), jackpot The benefits given after the game (for example, the privilege to give a game state in which the player is likely to win the next big win) are set differently. As a result, in the jackpot games executed on various occasions, the players can be motivated to play the jackpot games with more advantageous benefits, and various playability can be provided. be able to.

When the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds to 90 seconds) has passed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each game is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is carried out. , the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, whether or not the normal symbol wins is determined. When the normal pattern hits, the second ball entrance 640 is opened by changing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 3 seconds). be released. It should be noted that normally, the second ball entrance 640 is closed because the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position. Therefore, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 4 seconds) has passed, the lottery is performed. A normal symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is changed to the first symbol. It is displayed by the display device 37 and is also indicated by the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of pending balls for the through gate (normal entrance) 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and according to the lottery. variable display is started.

As described above, seven kinds of "jackpot A" to "jackpot G" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols. When it becomes "jackets A to C", it will be in a special game state with 7 rounds (7 rounds jackpot), and when it becomes "jackpot D", it will be in a special game state with 2 rounds (2 rounds jackpot). When the jackpot E" is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 15 rounds (15 round jackpot). When "jackpot F" is reached, a special game state with 5 rounds (5-round jackpot) is entered, and when "jackpot G" is reached, a special game state with 10 rounds (10-round jackpot) is entered.

Further, in the case of "jackpot A", "jackpot C", and "jackpot E to G", after the jackpot ends, the normal pattern fluctuation time is shortened, and when the normal pattern is won, it is second than the normal state. A time-saving state, which is a game state in which the electric accessory 640a is controlled to be opened so that the ball can easily enter the ball entrance 640, is provided until the special symbol variation is completed once (time-saving number of times is 1). . In the case of "jackpot B" and "jackpot D", after the jackpot ends, the normal state is entered without the time-saving state described above.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment has a function (so-called time-saving function) of shifting the game state to a time-saving state where it is easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 than the normal state. It does not have a function of changing the jackpot probability of special symbols and the jackpot probability of normal symbols (so-called probability variation function), but is not limited to this, using a pachinko machine having a probability variation function good too.

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is varied according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common (for example, all 8 rounds) for all jackpot types. Further, for example, the period during which the "time-saving state of normal symbols" is changed may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the ``time-saving state of normal symbols'' is reached, the time to open the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, or the electric accessory 640a is opened by hitting the normal symbol once. It is also possible to change the number of times to do so. In addition, in this embodiment, the type of the jackpot determines the privilege to be given after the jackpot ends. You may make it give the probability variation state of a special design later, and the time-saving state of a normal design. In addition, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is configured to continue until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is performed a predetermined specific number of times (once), but the number of time saving times is previously set a plurality of times (for example, 10 times), and when the number of times of special pattern fluctuation reaches the number of times of time saving, or when the lottery result of the special pattern becomes a specific lottery result, the time saving state may be terminated. In addition, a lottery different from the special pattern lottery (lottery to determine whether the time saving state continues or not) is executed, and if the lottery result does not continue the time saving state, the time saving state is terminated. may Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game by a specific jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot E to G), a time-saving state is always given, but other configurations may be used. , For example, if a time-saving provision number measuring means is provided to measure the number of times that the time-saving state is continuously provided, and the measurement result by the time-saving provision number measuring means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), which jackpot Even if a jackpot game by type is executed, the time saving state may not be provided after the jackpot game ends. As a result, it is possible to set the upper limit of the game period in which the player is advantageous, and to prevent the player from being provided with excessive gambling. In addition, as an example of suppressing excessive gambling, an example of setting an upper limit on the number of times that the time saving state is given in succession was shown. An upper limit may be set for the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the period of consecutive residences. Even if it is comprised in this way, since an upper limit can be set to the time-saving continuous-sou period, excessive gambling nature can be suppressed. In this case, the number of times the time saving state is granted (that is, the number of jackpots during the time saving period) is not set for a limited period (the time saving period in which the upper limit is set) In the meantime, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to win many jackpots.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the special symbol lottery that is performed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is displayed. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters. The number of times is reserved up to four times for each ball entrance, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four. The number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, it may be set so that the total number of balls entered into a plurality of ball entrances is suspended until the number reaches the upper limit (for example, 8).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot, error display, and the like. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicates a special symbol corresponding to the big win type (big wins A to G) in the case of a big win. A pattern (first pattern) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general ball entrances 63 through which a predetermined number (for example, five) of balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter the game area. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 displays a decorative third pattern (decorative pattern) corresponding to the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the display of the second pattern display device 83 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. Further, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 executes variable display of normal symbols (second symbols) using this as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the third symbols corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbols is performed.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the target of the symbols (main symbols) for informing the player of the variable display in an easy-to-understand manner using the third symbol display device 81 is changed according to the game state and the like. is configured as This is because, in the pachinko machine 10, whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given is determined based on the lottery result of special symbols in one game state (for example, normal state), and in another state. This is because in the game state (for example, time saving state), it is configured to be determined based on the lottery result of normal symbols. As described above, even with the pachinko machine 10 having complicated game characteristics, by switching the target of the symbol (main symbol) mainly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the special symbol and the normal symbol, the player can It is only necessary to pay attention to the variation display of the main symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, among the display of the game state under the control of the main control device 110, the special symbol display is performed by the first symbol display device 37, and the normal symbol display is performed by the second symbol display device 83. On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the display of the second pattern display device 83 . Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third pattern display device 81, or the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 9 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 9(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.9(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. As shown in FIG. 9(a), the first special symbol, which is one of the third symbols, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol (which varies depending on the game state) is shown in the first display area Dm on the left side (display on the left side). Three pattern rows are displayed: area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right (right display area Dm3). Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to display third symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Symbols, or normal symbols) are displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display).

The third symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, or normal symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm are composed of only main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". ing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery result by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a specific lottery result (a big win or a part of a small win in the case of special symbols, and a win in the case of normal symbols). In this case, a variable display is performed in which the same third symbols (main symbols) are aligned (for example, "777"), and after the variable display is finished, a big win is generated.

Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Also, in the first display area Dm, a third symbol is stop-displayed on the activated line L1. When the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of big winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

A second display area Dn (Dn1 to Dn6) is formed in the upper right area of the first display area Dm. In this second display area Dn, a symbol row showing a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a normal symbol is displayed. Specifically, the second display area Dn1 is an area in which a symbol row representing the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Dn2 is an area in which a symbol row representing the second special symbol is displayed. The second display area Dn3 is formed as an area in which a symbol row showing normal symbols is displayed, and a variable display corresponding to the variable display of each symbol is displayed.

In addition, in the second display area Dn, the reserved memory numbers of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are also displayed. Specifically, the second display area Ds4 is an area in which the reserved memory number of the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Ds5 is an area in which the reserved memory number of the second special symbol is displayed. The 2 display area Ds6 is an area in which the reserved memory number of normal symbols is displayed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and the display corresponding to the reserved memory number of each symbol are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. One pattern (a pattern to be notified to the player) is selected as the main pattern, and the other patterns are subordinate patterns that are less conspicuous than the main pattern. It is displayed in the second display area Dn as a pattern. As a result, the player can execute the optimum game only by confirming the display contents of the main symbols.

In the present embodiment, the secondary symbols are displayed in a smaller size than the main symbols so that they are less conspicuous than the main symbols. The secondary pattern may be made more difficult to distinguish than the main pattern by increasing the transmittance of the display mode of the secondary pattern or by moving the display area of the secondary pattern.

Further, as the pattern row mode of each pattern displayed in the second display area Dn, the pattern row displayed as the main pattern may be displayed as it is, or the symbol row as shown in FIG. ” and “X” are displayed in parallel in two rows, and two “○” symbols are displayed in the left and right rows, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol will win. It may also be configured to inform the player that it was.

Further, it may be constructed so that the secondary pattern corresponding to the pattern displayed as the main pattern is not displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the display of the secondary pattern is displayed at a place other than the third pattern display device 81. may

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol Dma) corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (Fig. 9 (b) )), and when the gaming state is the time-saving state, the main pattern (normal pattern main pattern Dmc) corresponding to the normal pattern is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 16(a)). Furthermore, when the second special symbol is variably displayed, regardless of the gaming state, the main symbol (special figure 2 main symbol Dmd) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (Fig. 17(b)).

In addition, although detailed description will be described later, in each game state, if a predetermined game condition is satisfied (for example, if the normal symbol that has started to change during the time saving state stops changing after the time saving state ends), It is constructed such that a combination different from the above-described combination of the main symbol and the secondary symbol is displayed. As a result, the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity with respect to the symbol variations that are executed across different game states. Further, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are all displayed as secondary symbols in the second display area Dn, and the pseudo symbol for effect is variably displayed as the main symbol (see FIG. 22(a)). It is configured as follows. Thus, during a period (for example, a small win period) in which each symbol is not variably displayed, the player can be made to feel that the symbol variation is being executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The main symbols (third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 are configured in a display mode consisting of numerals "0" to "9", but are distinguished from other main symbols. A display mode other than numbers may be used as long as the display mode is possible. For example, a display mode imitating a character or a display mode combining a character and a number may be used. Also, as the symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the first display area Dm, symbols other than the main symbols (that is, even if the same symbols stop together on the activated line L1, the player is not given a privilege. A symbol string including sub-symbols may be used as the symbol).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery results of special symbols and normal symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) described later are hits, the same main symbols are displayed in a fluctuating display. is performed, and the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

The main symbol (third symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1, and this stopped display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or longer), the player can determine whether the combination of third symbols corresponds to winning (lottery results of special symbols and ordinary symbols). is a hit or not) can be suppressed from being overlooked. In the stop display state described above, only the main symbols stopped and displayed on the active line L1 are displayed, and other main symbols (main symbols set in each symbol row and other than the active line L1) are displayed. It is preferable to not display the main symbol that is stopped and displayed at the point (display it inconspicuously). As a result, the player can be more clearly notified of the stop display result of the main symbols.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the main symbol (third symbol) of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol or the normal symbol is statically displayed for 1 second while there is no held ball, the third symbol is statically displayed even after that. continues. This state continues until a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new change of main symbols is started. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the main symbol (third symbol) was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance.

In this embodiment, the demo effect starts when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main symbol are stopped and displayed. However, regardless of the main symbols or secondary symbols, it may be configured such that the demonstration effect is started based on the elapsed time after all symbols are stopped and displayed. The display mode of the performance may be made different between the demonstration performance when only the symbols are stopped and displayed and the demonstration performance when both the main symbols and the sub-symbols are stopped and displayed. In this case, for example, in the demonstration effect that is executed when only the main symbols are stopped and displayed, a notification to prompt the progress of the game is executed, and in the demonstration effect when both the main symbols and the secondary symbols are stopped and displayed, a new It is preferable to execute notification for prompting a player to play a game. As a result, the game can be played smoothly.

Next, the sub-display area Ds provided below the first display area Dm will be described with reference to FIG. 9(a). As shown in FIG. 9A, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the first display area Dm. This secondary display area Ds is an area in which an auxiliary display mode for assisting the player's game, such as a game situation and a game explanation, is displayed corresponding to each game state and game result. Specifically, the number of pending symbols corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed (see FIG. 9(b)), and the content of the main symbol variation effect being executed in the first display area Dm is assisted. (see FIG. 22(a)), guides the content of the game to be played (see FIG. 22(b)), or displays the remaining period of a specific period (short period of time) that is advantageous to the player (see FIG. 22(b)). 15(a)). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 is continued. Below the variable display device unit 80, a left first ball entrance 64a through which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters the left first ball inlet 64a, the first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. Then, the main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display corresponding to the result of the lottery. In addition, the left first ball entrance 64a is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. This left first ball entrance 64a performs a right-handed game when the ball is hit to the path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 in front view (so-called left-handed game). It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball than in the case.

A storage device 750 and a specific general entrance 630 are provided below the first left entrance 64a. A detailed description of the storage device 750 will be given later with reference to FIG. and a side wall for forming a storage area capable of storing one ball. The storage valve 750a is variably controlled to change from a closed state in which balls can be stored in the case of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery to an open state, and when variably operated to the open state, the storage region (or balls that have flowed into the storage device 750 while the storage valve 750a is in the open state) flow down the storage device 750. In addition, the storage device 750 is disposed at a location where balls can be stored both when a left-handed game is performed and when a right-handed game is performed.

A specific general ball entrance 630 is provided below the storage device 750 so that a ball that has passed through the storage device 750 can enter. This specific general ball entrance 630 is a prize winning opening through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when balls enter, and is used as a trigger for operating the non-electric accessory 710 . A detailed description of the non-electric accessory 710 will be given later with reference to FIG. The provided non-electric accessory 710 is configured to be variable to a position where a ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

On the other hand, in the right area of the game board 13, there are two flow paths for the right-handed ball to flow down, a distribution member 700 for distributing the ball fired by the right-handed game to the two paths described above, Non-electric accessory 710, right first ball entrance 65b, through gate 67, second ball entrance 640, electric accessory 640a, first variable winning device 65, and second variable winning device 650 are arranged. Next, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. FIG.

Balls shot in a right-handed game are alternately distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 by the distribution member 700 . The ball distributed to the first flow path 701 passes through the curved path 701a (see FIG. 3), passes through the through gate 67 and the second ball inlet 640, and flows out to the lower right area. In addition, the ball distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a when the non-electric accessory 710 provided downstream thereof is in a closed state (see FIG. 5(a)). Then, it flows into the inflow port 704a, flows down the fifth flow channel 704b provided on the back side of the first flow channel 701 (the back side in the viewpoint of FIG. 2), and flows down the right side area on the game board 13 from the outflow port 704c. flow downwards. On the other hand, when the non-electric accessory 710 is in the open state (see FIG. 5(b)), it flows down the fourth flow path 703b and enters the right first ball entrance 64b. When a ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b, three balls are paid out as prize balls.

A detailed description of the non-electric accessory 710 will be given later with reference to FIG. The non-electric accessory 710 is configured to be variable to the closed state by its own weight.

The balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 merge in the lower right area, and the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65 , and flows into the out port 66 while flowing down a channel that can flow into the storage device 750 .

Here, the flow of balls distributed by the distribution member 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701, and FIG. 702 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when flowing down.

As shown in FIG. 3, the distribution member 700 alternately distributes the balls fired by the right-handed game to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, so when 100 balls are fired per minute , 50 particles flow down to the first channel 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and 50 particles flow down to the second channel 702 at intervals of 1.2 seconds. The first flow path 701 is composed of a ball passage formed with a passage width of one ball (about 15 mm), and a curved path 701a provided in the middle of the passage reduces the flow speed of the ball. It is configured such that the ball passage time required for the ball flowing into the first flow path 701 to flow out of the first flow path 701 is about 2 seconds.

A through gate 67 is provided downstream of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the curved path 701a), and a second ball inlet 640 is provided downstream of the through gate 67. . The second ball entrance 640 allows the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is closed, and the ball can pass through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is open. It is configured such that the ball that has been hit enters the second ball entrance 640 .

Also, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second ball entrance 640 after 0.2 seconds. Details will be described later, but since the normal pattern variation time that is executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is 3 seconds at the shortest, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 The opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the lottery of the normal symbols executed upon passing through the second ball entrance 640 is prevented. That is, the period from passing through the through gate 67 to reaching the second ball entrance 640 (electric accessory 640a) is shorter than the period required for the lottery of the normal symbols. As a result, it is possible to execute the lottery for normal symbols and to physically make it impossible to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 by shooting only one ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of inappropriate games. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ball fired by the right-handed game is distributed by the distribution member 700 to the first flow path 701 (the flow path in which the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are arranged) and the second flow 702 alternately, a normal pattern lottery is executed (a ball is passed through the through gate 67), a win is won in the normal pattern lottery, and the electric accessory 640a is opened to open the second ball entrance. Since at least three balls need to be shot in order to enter the ball into 640, it is possible to suppress the execution of even more unsuitable games (for example, single shot).

In this embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are provided in one of the two flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700. 67 may be provided and the second ball inlet 640 may be provided in the other flow path. With this configuration, for example, if a malicious player destroys the sorting member 700 and creates a state in which the ball flows down only one of the flow paths, the ball can pass through the through gate 67. It is possible to regulate the game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 when the normal symbol is won, and to suppress the illegal game from being performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the case where the sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the ball flows down in a shorter period than the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, it is configured such that it takes about 1.5 seconds for the ball that has flowed into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the flow outlet 704c. By configuring in this way, when 100 balls are shot toward the right side area per minute, the balls that flow into the first flow path 701 and the balls that are shot next to the balls flow into the second flow path 702. and the ball that has flowed into the bottom right area of the game board 13 (area where the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged) almost simultaneously (about 0.1 second difference) Become. Therefore, in the game state (big win state or small win state) in which each variable winning device is opened, it is possible to make it easier to win a plurality of balls at once.

In addition, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 (back side in the viewpoint of FIG. 4), and when viewed from the front (front view from the viewpoint of FIG. 4) A plurality of flow paths are configured to overlap. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball passages using the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the space for forming the ball passages (the area occupied by the ball passages on the game board 13). can.

Furthermore, the ball outlet (outlet 704c) of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the second ball inlet 640), and is positioned to the right of the game board 13. The lower area is configured such that the spheres flow downstream from the spheres flowing out from the first channel 701 . As a result, the ball flowing out from the outflow port 704c with force (the ball flowing out at a higher speed than the ball flowing down the first flow path 701) collides directly with the ball flowing out from the first flow path 701, resulting in irregular It is possible to suppress the situation in which ball flow occurs.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is used in which the balls fired by the right-handed game are alternately distributed to two flow paths by the distribution member 700, but other configurations may be used. Instead of alternating (1:1) with respect to the flow paths, the balls may be distributed at different ratios, or the balls may be distributed to three or more flow paths. Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 700 is used in which the distribution destination of the next passing ball changes depending on the weight of the passed ball. Dividers may also be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the operation flow of the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710 used in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 5(a) is a schematic diagram showing that both the storage device 750 and the non-electric role 710 are in a closed state (closed state), and FIG. 5(b) shows the storage device 750 and the non-electric role 7 is a schematic diagram showing that both objects 710 are in an open state (open state). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), when the non-electric accessory 710 is in the closed state (closed state), it is impossible (difficult) to let the ball enter the right first ball entrance 64b. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to perform a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 and prevent the ball from entering the right first ball inlet 64b.

This non-motorized accessory 710 has an action part that contacts when the ball passes through a specific place, and the action part is operated by the weight of the contacting ball, and is released based on the action. is configured to Specifically, the ball that enters the specific general ball entrance 630 abuts on the above-described action portion, and the action connection portion 710a operates in conjunction with the action, and the non-electric accessory 710 is released. As a result, a ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

Further, the right first ball inlet 64b is provided with a second acting portion with which the entering ball can come into contact. actuates the second action portion to close the non-electric accessory 710 . In this way, the non-electric accessory 710 is configured such that the variable state is switched based on the operation of the member acting by the weight of the ball without using an electric drive source. The configuration of the non-electric accessory 710 may be other than the configuration described above, and a known configuration that operates based on the weight of the ball may be used.

The entry of the ball into the specific general ball entrance 630, which is the trigger for operating (opening) the non-electric accessory 710, is stored in the storage device 750 provided above the specific general ball entrance 630 as described above. , and the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 when the storage device 750 is in a released state. Then, as described above, the storage device 750 is in a released state until a predetermined closing condition (for example, 10 seconds has elapsed) is met when a predetermined release condition (for example, the start of a jackpot game) is established. It is variably controlled so that

That is, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the jackpot game is started and the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the storage device 750 is released. Then, the storage device 750 is in the released state, and the non-electric accessory 710 is released based on the ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630 . In addition, in the first embodiment, since the storage device 750 is disposed at a position where the ball fired by either the left-handed game or the right-handed game can pass through the storage device 750, the right-handed game During the jackpot game in which the . ) can be entered into the specific general entrance 630 .

Therefore, it is possible to win both the payout of prize balls based on entering the first variable prize winning device 65 and the payout of prize balls based on entering the specific general ball entrance 630 during the jackpot game. be able to. Furthermore, since it is configured so that the ball that failed to win the first variable prize winning device 65 can enter the specific general ball entrance 630, the first variable prize winning device 65 can be used during the jackpot game, which has conventionally been a wasted ball. An added value that is advantageous to the player can be given to the balls that did not win the winning device 65.例文帳に追加

In the first embodiment, the storage valve 750a is operated to release the storage device 750 for 10 seconds after the jackpot game is started (after the first variable winning device 65 is opened). It is configured to operate variably. Therefore, the interval from the end of the first round to the start of the second round (inter-round interval ) period and the period during which the reservoir 750 is released.

As a result, the ball that has passed over the first variable prize winning device 65 during the interval period between rounds can enter the specific general ball entrance 630, so the first round in the jackpot game can be started early (within 10 seconds). 2) the game can be made to play willingly to finish it.

In addition, as the release timing of the storage device 750 executed during the jackpot game, the above release timing (after the jackpot game is started (after the first opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is executed)) 10 seconds ) may be set, and the storage device 750 may be set to be released for a predetermined period of time (eg, 3 seconds) at predetermined intervals (eg, 10-second intervals). By configuring in this way, when the end timing of each round of the jackpot game (the timing at which the interval between rounds is set) and the timing at which the storage device 750 is released are all matched, many A ball can be entered into a specific general ball entrance 630 .

Further, when the above-described configuration is used, by adjusting the timing at which the end condition of each round in the jackpot game is established (for example, the tenth ball, which is the round end condition, wins the first variable prize (By adjusting the timing to enter by operating the operation handle 51), it is possible to change the number of balls to be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 during the jackpot game, so that the player can enjoy the jackpot game. It is possible to provide a new game feature in which the end timing of each round in the middle is matched with a predetermined timing (the timing when the storage device 750 is in the released state), and the player can be motivated to play the game.

It should be noted that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a display mode for notifying the release timing of the storage device 750 or a display mode that allows the player to predict the timing at which the interval between rounds is executed. Thereby, the player can execute the game during the jackpot game while grasping the contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the execution of the jackpot game triggers the non-electric role 710 to be in an open state (open state). A ball can be surely entered into the ball entrance 64b. Thus, the first special pattern can be reliably varied in the time saving state to be shifted after the jackpot game is finished (time saving at the start of the continuous mode (initial time saving) to be shifted from the jackpot in the normal state).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when one ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b, the non-electric accessory 710 operates to shift to the closed state (closed state), so that a big hit is achieved. It is possible to prevent balls from entering the right first ball entrance 64b excessively during a game.

Next, referring to FIG. 6, a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 650e in the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2 which will be described later. will be explained.

FIG. 6(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which winning balls of the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the normal discharge passage 650e1, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing a state in which winning balls are distributed to a special discharge channel 650e2.

As shown in FIG. 6(b), when the switching member 650h is actuated, game balls that have passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. In this embodiment, a retention member 650n is provided in the special discharge channel 650e2. With this retention member 650n, only one game ball can be retained in the distribution destination area 650h3, which is the area to which the game ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2 side by the switching member 650h. As a result, when one game ball remains in the distribution destination area 650h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2, It flows down to the normal discharge channel 650e1.

The staying member 650n is composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and retract from the game board 13 side. The retention member 650n moves in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by actuation of the retention solenoid 209b (see FIG. 8). This retention member 650n can retain one game ball in the distribution destination area 650h3 by performing forward advance operation (closing operation). On the other hand, the game balls staying in the distribution destination area 650h3 flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 by retracting operation (opening operation) backward.

Here, the second variable prize winning device 650 allows a game ball to enter by opening the opening/closing door 650f1 during a small winning game. In addition, the retention member 650n becomes a closing operation during the small winning game (when the ball can be entered into the second variable winning device 650), and after the opening and closing door 650f1 is closed (to the second variable winning device 650) The opening operation is performed after a predetermined time has passed since the entry of the ball becomes impossible. That is, in this control example, even if the switching member 650h is operating, the game ball entering the second variable winning device 650 is limited to one game ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2. Thereby, it is possible to suppress excessive game balls flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2.

The game ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2 passes through the V winning switch 650e3. In the first embodiment, a jackpot game is awarded based on the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch 650e3.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of game balls flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2 is limited to one ball. The number of game balls to be restricted may be appropriately changed by making it possible or by allowing the staying member to operate a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small winning game.

With reference to FIG. 6(a), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 650e1 will be described. FIG. 6(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the channel solenoid 209c (see FIG. 8) is inactive and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h blocks the entrance opening of the special discharge channel 650e2. .

In the first embodiment, even when the flow path solenoid 209c is inactive, the retention member 650n provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2 is configured to operate. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the processing depending on whether or not the channel solenoid 9209c is operated, so that it is possible to reduce the design cost and the program capacity.

When the channel solenoid 650k is non-operating, all game balls that have passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 flow down to the normal discharge channel 650e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2, there is no influence by the retention member 650n newly provided in the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the flow of the small winning game in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 10A shows a small winning game of small winning type B executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (left first ball entrance 64a, right first ball entrance 64b) FIG. 10B is a timing chart showing the flow of execution based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (left first ball entrance 64a, right first ball entrance 64b). It is a timing chart showing the flow of the small hit game of the small hit type A. FIG. 11(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the small winning game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640, and FIG. 11(b) is the second ball entrance 640. It is a timing chart showing the flow of a jackpot game that is executed based on the entry of the ball into. Details of operation control of the various devices shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 will be described later.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small hit game for 60 seconds is executed (see FIG. 22). In this small winning game, a game is executed in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and when the winning ball of the second variable winning device 650 passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the small winning game ends. It is configured such that a jackpot game is executed later. If a small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ball can pass (easily pass) through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3) during the small win game (small win type A). , Small hit (small hit type B) that the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3) (difficult to pass) is selected.

First, description will be made with reference to FIG. Variation control of the first special symbol is performed by the main controller 110 based on the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 . At that time, the display control device 114 executes the first special symbol variation effect indicating that the first special symbol is being varied for the same period (30 seconds) as the variation time of the first special symbol. Incidentally, the time of the first special symbol variation effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops and the main control device 110 starts the small winning control (when the small winning game is executed), the opening and closing door 650f1 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed. The V inlet solenoid 209a for actuating the valve, the retention solenoid 209b for variably operating the retention member 650n, and the channel solenoid 209c for variably operating the switching member 650h are turned on according to a predetermined opening scenario. Specifically, the V entrance solenoid 209a repeats the opening operation twice for 15 seconds after the small winning game is executed and the ON state for 0.5 seconds, and then the OFF state for 15 seconds and 0.8 seconds. An open scenario for a total of 60 seconds is set so as to be on and off for 13.2 seconds.

Next, the retention solenoid 209b is turned on for 55 seconds (state in which the ball is retained) after the execution of the small winning game, and then turned off for 5 seconds (state in which the retention of the ball is released), for a total of 60. A second release scenario is set. The above-mentioned V inlet solenoid 209a and the open scenario of the retention solenoid 209b are open scenarios common to the small hit types A and B.

On the other hand, the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is configured so that different opening scenarios are set depending on the type of small hit, and the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3) (hard to pass) small hit In the small hit type B, which is a type, an open scenario is set that continues to be off for 60 seconds during the small hit game period (see FIG. 10 (a)), and the ball passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) In the small hit type A which is a possible (easy to pass) small hit type, an open scenario is set in which the small hit game is executed for 40 seconds off, 15 seconds on, and 5 seconds off (Fig. 10 (b)).

In this way, among the three solenoids that are driven while the small winning game is being executed, only one solenoid is driven differently, so that the ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). By enabling execution of a small winning game and a small winning game in which a ball is difficult to pass, a common release scenario can be used for the small winning games executed with different types of small winnings, thereby reducing the processing load. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b is made common, and the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is changed according to the small hit type. Well, for example, the retention solenoid 209b and the channel solenoid 209C may be used in the same opening scenario, while the V inlet solenoid 209a may be opened in a different scenario. In this case, a common opening scenario is set so that a period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and a period during which the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V prize-winning switch 650e3) are set according to the timing at which the ball wins the second variable prize winning device 650. As an opening scenario for the V entrance solenoid 209a, an opening scenario in which the V entrance solenoid 209a is turned on by matching a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) to a period in which the ball can pass, and a specific area (V It is preferable to use an open scenario in which the winning switch 650e3) is made to correspond to a period in which the ball cannot pass, and the V entrance solenoid 209a is turned on. Furthermore, it is preferable to unify the period during which the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on in any opening scenario. By configuring in this way, it is possible to match up to the number of winning balls of the second variable winning device 650 .

Also, as in the above example, the opening scenario is not made different only for the V inlet solenoid 209a, but even when the same opening scenario is used, the start position (execution start position) of the opening scenario is made different. A small winning game in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and a small winning game in which the ball is difficult to pass may be configured to be executable. When configured in this manner, it is not necessary to prepare a different release scenario for each small winning type, so the storage capacity can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11(a), the flow of the small winning game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640 will be described. In addition, in this embodiment, the small winning game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640 (that is, the winning of the small winning in the lottery of the second special pattern (special figure 2) The small hit game executed based on) is configured so that all the same operation control is executed, so the small hit type will be described without limitation.

In addition, in FIG. 11(a), the time for the entire small hit control (small hit game time) is set to 10 seconds for explanation. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) elapses after the small winning game (control) is started, the V entrance solenoid 209a among the plurality of solenoids described above is turned off, and the open/close door 650f1 is closed. When the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed, no new balls enter the second variable winning device 650. Next, after the set time t2 (9 seconds) has passed, the retention solenoid 209b is turned off, the retention member 650n is opened (retracted state), and the ball retained by the retention member 650n flows down to the special discharge path 650e2. To go. The set time t2 is set to a time sufficient for the balls that existed in the second variable winning device 650 to flow down the normal discharge channel 650e1 when the set time t1 elapses. In the second variable winning device 650, only the balls retained by the retention member 650n flow down through the special discharge channel 650e2. Next, a set time t3 (5 seconds) elapses, the channel solenoid 209c is turned off, and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h closes the opening of the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2. The set time t3 is set to a time sufficient for the ball flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2 to flow downstream from the movable range of the guide piece 650h2 when the set time t2 has elapsed.

By driving the retention solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209c with a time difference in this way, even if the ball is retained within the movable range of the guide piece 650h2 by the retention member 650n, the guide piece 650h2 and the retention member 650n Since it is possible to reliably flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 without interfering with the retained balls, the device can be made compact.

Finally, based on the fact that the ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 has passed through the V winning switch (specific area) 650e3, the main control device 110 ends the small winning game control, performs the big winning game control, and performs the first A specific winning opening 65 is opened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11(b), points different from FIG. 11(a) will be described. In FIG. 11(b), since the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is a big win (symbol win), the second variable winning device 650 is not operated. That is, after the second special symbol variation control by the main controller 110 ends, the jackpot control is started. In the meantime, the display control device 114 executes a second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is in the process of varying.

Here, the relationship between the effect executed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11(a) and the time of the effect executed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11(b) will be described. In FIG. 11(a), the second special symbol variation time (2 seconds) and the small hit production time (10 seconds) are set to 12 seconds, and in FIG. 11(b), the second special symbol variation time is set at 12 seconds. This is the timing at which the jackpot game is started even if the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the V winning or the symbol winning described above, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (first specific winning This is to match the opening timing of the port 65a). By configuring in this way, the player can be prevented from grasping the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the effect executed by the display control device can be enjoyed to the end.

Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow in this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the game state is roughly divided into the normal state, the left-hand hitting game that executes the lottery of the first special symbol (special 1) aiming at the left first ball entrance 64a, and the game state of the time saving state In the case, the second special symbol (Special 2) is drawn for the second ball entrance 640, or when the game state is a win (big win, small win) state, the first variable winning device 65, the second A right-handed game aiming at the 2 variable winning device 650 is performed, and a win (big win or small win) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the left-handed game, and the winning game ends. When the time-saving state is provided later, the game shifts to a right-handed game (continuous mode), and shifts to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. This continuous mode (specific game state) is terminated when a predetermined condition is established (when the game state shifts to the normal state and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0), and the normal state It shifts to a left-handed game. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, during the left-handed game (normal state), the game is played with the aim of shifting to the right-handed game (specific game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed game is performed. During the continuous mode (specific game state), the game is played with the aim of continuing the continuous mode (specific game state). In this way, in a gaming machine having different game characteristics, by making the different game characteristics correspond to games (right-handed game, left-handed game) in which the player shoots the ball from different positions, It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, as a trigger for shifting from the normal state in which the left-handed game is performed to the specific game state (Renso mode) in which the right-handed game is performed, the first special symbol lottery is a symbol that wins the jackpot. A plurality (two types) of a win and a V prize winning in which a first special pattern wins a small win and a specific area (V prize switch 650e3) is passed during the small win game to execute a big win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game during the normal state of left-handed hitting, which is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 12, in a normal game state in which a left-handed game is played, a game is executed aiming at the left first ball entrance 64a. A lottery for the first special pattern is conducted based on the entry of the ball into the left first ball entrance 64a, and when the jackpot type of the lottery result is the jackpot A (80% of the jackpot win), after the jackpot ends. A time-saving game state (time-saving state) in which winning to the second ball entrance 640 is facilitated is provided. When shifting to the time-saving game state (time-saving state), there is a right-handed game that shoots a ball to the right side of the game board 13 to aim at the second ball entrance 640 arranged in the right side area of the game board 13. done. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is jackpot B (20% when the jackpot is won), the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is not given after the jackpot ends, so the left-handed game is performed after the jackpot game. normal state). In addition, in the present embodiment, there is also a route where the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small win, and the small win type is a small win A (10% of the time when the small win is won) will result in a big win (V prize). . In this case, after the end of the jackpot, the state shifts to the time-saving game state. In addition, even if the small hit type is a small hit A, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3) during the small hit game, or if the small hit type of the won small hit When is a small hit B, it does not shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), but shifts to a normal state in which a left-handed game is executed.

Next, in the pachinko machine 10, the flow during a right-handed game that is advantageous to the player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10, as described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5, the right first ball entrance 64b is arranged in the right area of the game board 13, and a jackpot game in which a right-handed game is executed. At least one ball is configured to enter the right first ball entrance 64b. In other words, in the normal game state (normal state), when winning the jackpot to which the time saving state is given after the jackpot game is finished, at least one reserved memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stored after the jackpot game is finished. It has, and the time saving state is started in a state where there is no reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

As shown in FIG. 12, in the pachinko machine 10, when both the reserved memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) exist, the second special symbol (Special figure 2) lottery (fluctuation) based on the reserved memory is configured to be preferentially executed (so-called special 2 priority fluctuation), but the second special symbol (special figure 2) reserved memory In the absence state, lottery (fluctuation) based on the reserved memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed. Here, since the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) during the time saving state is configured to be set to 150 seconds regardless of the lottery result, after the time saving state is started During 150 seconds, it will be in a state where the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed. In addition, when the variation (lottery) of any special symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2) is executed once during the time saving state, the condition for ending the time saving state is established ( 1 time reduction).

During the period in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) fluctuates in this time-saving state, a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, and the second special symbol ( You can acquire up to 4 reserved memories of special figure 2). Here, if it is possible to acquire the reserved memory of the second special pattern (special pattern 2), after the time saving ends, the fluctuation of the first special pattern stops, and after shifting to the normal state, the reserved memory of the second special pattern A lottery will be held based on As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the lottery for the second special symbol is set to win a big win with a probability of 1/300 and win a small win with a probability of 299/300. 2. For the small wins won by lottery of special symbols, a small win game that allows the ball to pass through the specific area (V winning switch 630e3) (easy to pass) is executed, and all the big wins that are executed when V wins are A jackpot is set in which a time-saving state is given after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, as long as the second special symbol has a reserved memory, the continuous mode (specific game state) is continued.

On the other hand, during the period in which the first special symbol is fluctuating in the time-saving state (during the continuous preparation period), it is not possible to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol, and there is no reserved memory of the second special symbol. When the time-saving state ends in , the state shifts to the normal game state as it is, and the consecutive villa mode (specific game state) ends.

In addition, if a plurality of (for example, 3) pending memories of the second special symbol are acquired during the preparation period for the consecutive villas, the second special symbol will start to change when the time saving state is entered again. Become. In this embodiment, the second special symbol variation time (special 2 variation time) in the time saving state is set to 2 seconds regardless of the lottery result, and is shorter than the normal symbol variation time (3 seconds) in the time saving state. Since it is set so as to be, it is suppressed to newly acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the time saving state in which the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which excessive prize balls are provided to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, once it rushes into a time saving state, it is comprised so that a time saving state may loop with a probability of about 90%.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 23, the effect display contents executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the flow of effect display contents that change according to the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 is a timing chart (first half) showing the relationship between the game state and the effect state in this embodiment, and FIG. 14 is a timing chart (second half) showing the relationship between the game state and the effect state in this embodiment.

Here, the decorative symbols (third symbols) displayed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 used in this embodiment will be briefly described. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment can display decorative symbols (third symbols) corresponding to three types of symbols, ie, a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a normal symbol, on the third symbol display device 81. Among them, the decorative pattern (third pattern) corresponding to the pattern that should most inform the player of the lottery result is displayed as the main pattern in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9) of the third pattern display device. However, a decorative pattern (third pattern) corresponding to other patterns is displayed as a secondary pattern in the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9) of the third pattern display device.

By switching the pattern to be displayed as the main pattern in accordance with the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the player can only recognize the display result of the main pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It is configured so that the complicated gameplay can be grasped in an easy-to-understand manner.

Regarding the above-described control for switching the symbols to be displayed as the main symbols, a detailed description will be given later. Based on, it is configured to switch and display the pattern displayed as the main pattern and the pattern displayed as the secondary pattern.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the game state is the normal (special 1) state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed, "state 1" is set as the effect state. During the period in which this "state 1" is set, the first special symbol is displayed as the main symbol, the normal symbol is displayed as the subordinate symbol, and the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (Fig. 9(b)). In this way, in the "normal (special 1)" state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed, by performing a display that allows the player to easily recognize the lottery result of the first special symbol. , the content of the game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, in the "jackpot" state in which the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot game is being executed, the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 A jackpot effect image is displayed. In this case, since the main symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, "-" is set as the rendering state.

After the jackpot game is over, the game state shifts to the time saving state and in the "time saving (special 1)" state in which the variation of the first special symbol is executed, the production state is "state 3" based on the variation of the normal symbol. ” or “state 5” is set. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the "time saving (special 1)" state will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol is performed in the "time saving (special 1)" game state. In order to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol, a right-handed game is played, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 (executing the lottery of the normal symbol), and the winning of the normal symbol (normal symbol) It is necessary to open the electric accessory 640a with a probability of 1/20.

In other words, when the game state is the "time saving (special 1)" state, the player plays the game expecting that the lottery result of the normal symbol will win. Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol that starts to change during the time saving state stops changing during the time saving state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed. Since it is set to be an open pattern (long open) that is advantageous to the player, normal pattern fluctuation is started while the game state is not a time saving state (for example, a jackpot state), and electric power is generated during the time saving state When the operation of the accessory 640a is started, or when the normal figure fluctuation is started during the time saving state, and when the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started after the time saving state ends (for example, normal state), the electric role A normal release pattern (short release) is executed instead of a release pattern (long release) in which the action of releasing the object 640a is advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine configured as described above, if the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol under the condition that the game state is shifted to the time-saving state. In spite of the above-described time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is short-circuited and the variation of the normal pattern is displayed as the main pattern, giving the player a sense of distrust. There was a problem of hoarding.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the "time saving (special 1)" state is set as the game state, the fluctuation situation of the normal design is determined, and the timing when the fluctuation of the normal design is started and the fluctuation of the normal design is stopped (the timing at which the electric accessary 640a is opened when winning a prize) is both in the "time saving (special 1)" state, the effect state is "state 5 ” is set, and in other cases, “state 3” is set.

Then, during the period in which "state 5" is set as the effect state, the normal symbol is displayed as the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol as subordinate symbols, and the second special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol. is displayed (see FIG. 16(a)). In this way, in the "time saving (special 1)" state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed for a long period of time (150 seconds), the symbol corresponding to the main symbol is switched from the first special symbol to the normal symbol. As a result, the player can easily recognize the lottery result of the normal symbols, and can be informed of the content of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, during the period in which "state 3" is set as the effect state, the pseudo symbols corresponding to none of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol. , the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed as a subsidiary symbol, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16(a)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the content of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the state where the second special symbol is fluctuating, "state 4" is set as the performance state regardless of the game state (regardless of the normal state or the time saving state). During the period in which "state 4" is set as the effect state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed as the main symbol (see FIG. 17(b)). Then, as shown in FIG. 14, in the case where "state 5" is set as the production state, if the lottery result of the first special symbol during fluctuation is a specific result (for example, a big hit), the first When the remaining variation time of one special symbol becomes equal to or less than a predetermined period, "state 6" is set as the performance state.

During the period in which "state 6" is set as the effect state, the first special pattern is drawn by lottery from the variable display mode in which the third pattern corresponding to the normal pattern executed in "state 5" is the main pattern. The simulated pattern based on the result is variably displayed as the main pattern. By doing so, it is possible to secure a period for suggesting to the player the lottery result of the first special symbol that has won the jackpot. Therefore, from the state where "state 5" is set and the variable display mode with the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol as the main symbol is displayed, the jackpot game of the first special symbol is suddenly started, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the problem that the user is confused.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect state is shifted from "state 5" to "state 6" is the timing at which the normal symbol variation is executed. As a result, it is possible to perform the transition of the presentation state without discomfort.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small win, a specific performance for a small win is executed (see FIG. 22). When this game state is the normal state and the small winning game based on the first special symbol is executed, "state 2" is set as the effect state.

During the period in which "state 2" is set as the effect state, in the specific effect for the small win, a pseudo pattern that does not correspond to any of the first special pattern, the second special pattern, and the normal pattern is variably displayed as the main pattern. be done. The pseudo symbols variably displayed in this case are pseudo symbols variably displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game. That is, the timing at which the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a grid) is displayed for a predetermined period before the timing when the second variable winning device 650 opens, that is, the predetermined stop display mode is displayed. The timing is set so that the ball fired after the ball can win the second variable 650, and the effect is given to make the player think that the second variable winning device 650 has been opened based on the stop display of the pseudo symbol. executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a small winning game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, a small winning game that is advantageous to the player (a ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)) and a disadvantageous game and a small winning game, and the type of the stop display mode of the pseudo symbols that are variably displayed during the small winning game is set according to the type of the small winning game being executed. For example, as the stop display mode of the pseudo symbol corresponding to the timing when the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened at the timing when the ball can pass through the specific area, a specific stop display mode (for example, a specific number (7), etc.) eye) is displayed. By configuring in this way, the type of the small winning game and the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 can be grasped by the variable display of the pseudo symbols executed during the small winning game, so that the player can A small winning game can be enjoyed.

Next, a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23. FIG. In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 and each pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern, normal pattern) are varied and reserved. Then, display control is executed to change the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 . By configuring in this way, in a gaming machine designed so that noteworthy symbol lotteries (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery) are different depending on the game state, the game can be played. Only by making the player grasp the display result of the main pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to easily inform the player whether or not the game result is advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the game state is the time saving state and the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is started. be. In this embodiment, during the time-saving state, the right-handed game is a game that is advantageous to the player, so guidance for guiding the game method is provided in the guidance display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the first display area Dm. As a display, the characters "Right-handed" are displayed. In the central part of the first display area Dm, a normal pattern main pattern Dmc whose main pattern is the third pattern corresponding to the normal pattern is variably displayed in synchronism with the normal pattern. Further, on the left side of the first display area Dm, a main reserved design display area Dm5 for displaying the reserved memory number of the second special design as the main reserved design is formed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 15(a), the reserved memory number of the second special symbol is "0".

A third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed in the second display region Dn1 formed on the upper right side of the first display region Dm, and a third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is displayed in the second display region Dn2. However, in the third display area Dn3, the third symbols corresponding to the normal symbols are displayed as subsidiary symbols, respectively, and in the second display areas Dn1 and Dn3, the corresponding symbols are showing that they are fluctuating. Therefore, the third pattern (secondary pattern) is variably displayed, and the third pattern (secondary pattern) is stopped and displayed in the second display area Dn2 to indicate that the corresponding pattern is not changed.

In addition, the display mode of the sub-symbols displayed in the second display areas Dn1 to Dn3 is a display mode corresponding to whether or not the corresponding symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) are fluctuating. If it is In addition, as a display mode corresponding to a stationary symbol, it is sufficient to be able to grasp that the symbol is not fluctuating (that it is stationary), and as shown in the second display area Dn2 of FIG. 15(a), "- , or a display mode in which the stop display mode of the previous variable display is displayed as it is.

Then, in the second display area Dn4, the number "3" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol is three, and in the second display area Dn5 , The number "0" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is 0 (the state in which the reserved memory is not acquired), and the second display In the region Dn6, the numeral "4" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved memory of normal symbols (the number of reserved balls) is four.

As a display mode for indicating the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of each pattern displayed in the second display areas Dn4 to Dn6, the number of reserved memories of each pattern is concretely shown as in the present embodiment. A display mode that shows the value numerically may be used, or a display mode that shows only the presence or absence of reserved memory for each pattern (for example, "○" if there is reserved memory, "-" if there is no reserved memory) may be used. In this case, the number of reserved memories may be suggested by changing the color of the display mode of "○" indicating that there is reserved memory. Also, a display mode that abstractly suggests the number of reserved memories may be used.

The state shown in FIG. 15(a) is a state in which the first special symbol performs a variation with a variation time of 150 seconds and the second special symbol does not vary. A secondary symbol corresponding to the special symbol is variably displayed, and "-" indicating that the secondary symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not variably displayed is displayed in the second display area Dn2.

Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds formed below the first display area Dm, "150 seconds" is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 as a time display for indicating the remaining period of the time saving state. In the second sub-display area Ds2 on the left side of the display area Ds1, "Countdown!" In addition, in this embodiment, as the remaining period displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of the special figure 1 during the time saving state is calculated, and the calculated value is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to display an accurate period until the time-saving state ends on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible for the player to play the game without anxiety until the period elapses. However, a different value may be displayed as the remaining period display displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1. may be set randomly and displayed so that the value is subtracted.

In this case, until the displayed value becomes 0, the difference between the value indicating the remaining fluctuation period of Toku-zu 1 and the value set at random is added and displayed, or the displayed value is "???" It is recommended to change the display to . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state will continue, and the player can always play the game while being excited.

FIG. 15(b) shows that the game state is a time-saving state, and when 40 seconds have passed since the first special symbol (special figure 1) started to fluctuate (from the state shown in FIG. 15(a)) It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in. As shown in FIG. 15(b), the general pattern main pattern Dmc is stopped and displayed in the mode (display mode of "555") to notify that the winner has been won in the normal pattern lottery, and the first display area Dm. A guide display for notifying that the electric accessory 640a is long-released by winning the normal symbol and the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 is displayed on the lower right side of .

In addition, "110 seconds" is displayed as the remaining period of the time saving state in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and the second sub-display area Ds2 displays the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. "Charging time" is displayed to indicate that it is in a state where it is easy to open (state in which the electric accessory 640a is operated for a long time). Then, in the second display area Ds3, a stop display mode ("○○") is displayed to indicate that the normal symbol has been won.

In this way, while the game state is in the time saving state, while the variation of the special figure 1 is being executed, the lottery result of the normal pattern (normal pattern) is the pattern that the player should pay attention to the most, so the general pattern main The lottery result of the general pattern is displayed using the pattern Dmc. Therefore, it is possible to provide a display that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display position and display mode of each main pattern (special pattern 1 main pattern, special pattern 2 main pattern, general pattern main pattern, pseudo main pattern) displayed in the first display area Dm In addition, the stop display mode for indicating a specific lottery result (for example, win) in which the lottery result of the symbol is advantageous to the player is also the same stop display mode (for example, a grid). Even if the target pattern of the pattern is changed in accordance with the game state, the effect display (effect variation display) that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable is executed. As a configuration of , the display position and display mode may be different for each main pattern, and the stop display mode for indicating a specific lottery result (for example, winning) in which the lottery result of the pattern is advantageous to the player may be different. You can let

FIG. 16(a) is a diagram showing the state after the game state is the time-saving state and the ball enters the second ball inlet 640 during the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1). As shown in FIG. 16(a), when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a display indicating that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 is displayed in the upper center of the first display area Dm. "Charging complete" is displayed. Then, in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5, a display mode (a black circle in the drawing) indicating that the reserved memory number of the second special symbol has become "1" is displayed. In this state, the number "1" is displayed in the second display area Dn5 as a display mode indicating that the number of pending memories of the second special symbol is one.

In the present embodiment, as a closing condition of the electric accessory 640a when winning the normal symbol during time saving and the electric accessory 640a is in the long open state, one ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640. 11 seconds (total opening time 6 seconds) have elapsed since the ball or the electric accessory 640a started to operate. Since the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed and the next normal symbol variation state is being executed, the normal symbol main symbol Dmc is variably displayed in the central portion of the first display area Dm. In addition, "100 seconds" is displayed as the remaining period of the time saving state in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, at the time when one reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired, after the time saving state ends (after the fluctuation of the first special symbol during fluctuation stops), the second The variable display of 2 special symbols is started, and it is designed so that a symbol hit or a V winning prize can be obtained with a high probability. Furthermore, after the jackpot game executed based on the lottery of the second special pattern is completed, the time-saving state is always imparted, so that a chance to acquire the reserved memory of the second special pattern comes again. In addition, when a plurality of reserved memories of the second special symbol are obtained in one time-saving state (while the first special symbol is fluctuating), a jackpot game corresponding to the obtained number is executed. It is Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player by displaying the "holding memory of the second special symbol" that the player most expects during the time saving state as the main reserved symbol on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

In this embodiment, as the display mode of the main reserved pattern, it is configured to be able to display up to four "black circles" corresponding to the number of reserved memories, but other configurations may be used, for example, In order to effectively notify whether or not the continuous mode is continued (whether or not the second special symbol is retained or stored), the display mode of the main retained symbol corresponding to the first retained memory of the second special symbol is changed to another main retention. You may make it differ from the display mode of a design. As a display mode in this case, the main reserved pattern corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special pattern is emphasized more than the other main reserved patterns by making the main reserved pattern different in size, color, shape and pattern. Alternatively, only the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol may be displayed at a position different from the other main reserved symbols. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the main reserved design, the mode of the display area side where the main reserved design is displayed (the display mode of the background image) may be varied. Also, only when the first reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired, the effect may be notified by the voice output means or the light emitting means.

FIG. 16(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the game state is the time saving state and the variation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) remains 1 second. In this state, a pseudo performance symbol that does not correspond to the display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol and the normal symbol as the main symbol is displayed as the pseudo main symbol Dmb in the center of the first display area Dm. This pseudo main symbol Dmb is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swaying state until the period in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (until the remaining period display in the first sub-display area Ds1 becomes "0 seconds"). .

This pseudo effect pattern is the timing when the game state is the time saving state and the fluctuation period of the normal pattern exceeds the remaining time short period (timing when "state 3" is set as the effect state). is what is displayed. By configuring in this way, even if the third pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal pattern whose fluctuation period exceeds the remaining time short period is displayed as the general pattern main pattern Dmc, the normal pattern main pattern Dmc wins. Even if the stop display is made in the display mode showing , the problem that the electric accessory 640a is short-circuited and the player is distrustful of the performance can be suppressed.

In addition, the third pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal pattern whose fluctuation period is longer than the remaining time short period is displayed as the general pattern main pattern Dmc, and the display of the general pattern main pattern Dmc is interrupted at the timing when the time saving state is completed ( (Switching to another main symbol display) is also conceivable, but if the main symbol display used to make the player pay attention to the display content is changed in the middle, it will give the player a great sense of discomfort. There's a problem. Such a problem can also be solved by using the configuration described above.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the pseudo effect pattern, since the display mode indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed, the pseudo effect symbol is displayed in accordance with the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops. The lottery result of the first special symbol can be displayed smoothly only by changing the rocking state (temporary stop state) to a completely stopped stop state (see FIG. 17(a)). In addition, when the temporarily stopped main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb) is temporarily stopped in a display mode indicating a win, the player is surely given a privilege because the lottery result of the first special symbol is a win. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player is distrustful of the display mode (display result) of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

It should be noted that during the period of displaying the pseudo effect pattern described in the present embodiment as the main pattern (during the period in which "state 3" is set as the effect state), a configuration other than the structure of displaying the pseudo effect pattern may be used. For example, during that period, any main symbol may not be displayed, and an effect may be executed to encourage the completion of the time saving state. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the general pattern main pattern Dmc corresponding to the normal pattern in which the fluctuation period longer than the remaining time short period is set from being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful.

In the state shown in FIG. 16(b), the pseudo main symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the variation of the normal symbols is stopped and displayed. is stop-displayed in a display mode (“◯×”) indicating the disconnection. In this way, the fluctuation stop timing of the normal design is within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the fluctuation stop timing of the special figure 1 (the end timing of the time saving state), and the lottery result of the normal design is out Even in the case of , the effect display using the pseudo main symbol Dmb is executed.

In FIG. 16(b), since the display mode indicating that the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is two is displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5, after the time saving state ends, the second special symbol will start to change. In order to guide the player to that effect, the message "Charge release time soon!" is displayed above the first display area Dm. This "charge release time" indicates a period during which a big win corresponding to the number of second special symbols held and stored is executed.

Then, when the charge release time is entered, as shown in FIG. 17A, the information in the first display area Dm displays "Charge release time rush", and the special figure 1 main symbol Dma is stopped and displayed. The normal pattern that is displayed in a variable display at this timing (time saving end timing), that is, the normal pattern in which the fluctuation in the time saving state is started and the fluctuation stop timing is after the time saving end is the second display area as a secondary pattern Since it is displayed in Dn3, it is possible to suppress the above-described problem when the variable display of the normal main symbol Dmc is shown to the player.

Next, when the charge release time starts, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. In this case, since the variation of the second special symbol is started, the display mode indicating the reserved memory number (number of reserved symbols) of the special figure 2 displayed in the main reserved design display area Dm5 is updated, and the remaining one reserved A display mode showing the number of memories is displayed. In addition, in the second display area Dn, the sub-symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is displayed in the second display area Dn1 while being stopped and displayed as the main symbol in FIG. Toku-zu 2 fluctuation is displayed, and in the second display area Dn3 normal-zu fluctuation is displayed in the secondary design.

In this embodiment, when the variation of the special figure 2 is executed, it is designed to be easy to win either the jackpot or the small win (100% winning), and the period during which the special figure 2 is fluctuating , there is no need to make the player pay attention to the normal pattern fluctuation. Therefore, while the special figure 2 is being varied, by displaying the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd as the main symbol, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In this embodiment, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 2 seconds in both the normal state and the time saving state. This period of 2 seconds is shorter than the shortest period set as the variation time of normal symbols. As a result, during the period when the special figure 2 is fluctuating, it is suppressed that the normal figure fluctuation is executed and stopped without straddling a plurality of game states. This suppresses the occurrence of extra effects during the special figure 2 fluctuation. In addition, by configuring in this way, when the special figure 2 fluctuates during the time saving state, during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the time saving), the per variation of the normal figure is executed and stopped, It is possible to suppress the increase in the special figure 2 reservation during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the time saving) due to the opening of the electric accessory 640a, and to provide the player with excessive balls. can be suppressed.

In addition, it is configured so that the fluctuation period of the normal design and the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 can be selected from among a plurality, and only when the selected fluctuation period meets the predetermined conditions, during the special figure 2 fluctuation period ), the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be openable. As a result, there is an effect that the player can be provided with a sense of unexpectedness, and can be motivated to play the game.

Next, when the special figure 2 variation shown in FIG. 17(b) is won and stopped, the display screen shown in FIG. 18(a) is displayed. That is, in the first display area Dm, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is stopped in a display mode ("555") indicating a small hit, and is opened in the lower right area of the first display area Dm during the small hit game. A guide display is displayed to guide the player to the location of the second variable winning device 650 to be won. Then, "Aim for V" is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds.

Then, during the small winning game shown in FIG. 18(a), when the ball passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the second variable winning device 650 and the big winning game is started, FIG. 18(b) ) is displayed. In this big hit effect screen, the main pattern is not displayed in the main display area Dm, and the third pattern corresponding to each pattern (special 1, special 2, normal pattern) is displayed in the second display region Dm as a secondary pattern. Is displayed. As a result, the player can enjoy the big win performance without worrying about the variable display of each pattern (special 1, special 2, general pattern) being executed.

Further, in the jackpot performance, the main display area Dm displays "charge bonus 1st time" as the number of consecutive jackpots indicating the number of jackpots executed during the consecutive game mode. "ROUND1" is displayed as a round number display indicating the number of rounds. As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of round numbers (2, 5, 7, 10, 15 rounds) are set in the jackpot game. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot can be executed after the end of the time saving state by the number of special figures 2 pending stored during the special figure 1 fluctuation (150 seconds fluctuation) during the time saving state.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment configured as described above, the display of a plurality of jackpots executed during the consecutive game state is counted as one period from the start to the end of the consecutive game state. It is configured to be able to display a special period cumulative display and a specific period cumulative display that tallies only the jackpot games based on the jackpot rights (that is, the number of special figures 2 reserved) acquired in one special figure 1 change. , In the example shown in FIG. 18(a), the round number display area Dm6 formed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm corresponds to the number of rounds targeted for the jackpot game within the above-mentioned specific period. Numerals are displayed.

In the round number display area Dm6, it is determined how many rounds of jackpot games are accumulated based on the reserved storage of the special figure 2 obtained by one special figure 1 variation, and the determination result is obtained. is displayed. Specifically, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variation (150 seconds variation) during the time saving game has ended, the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation (that is, stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a described later Winning information on the special figure 2) is extracted, and the number of executable jackpots and the number of rounds are determined. Then, a display mode including at least the determination result is displayed in the round number display area Dm6.

The round number display mode displayed in the round number display area Dm6 includes a confirmed execution round number display mode (represented by a solid circle in FIG. 18B) indicating the number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed. , A running round display mode showing the round currently running (indicated by a black circle in FIG. 18(b)) and a jackpot right acquired during a specific period (special figure 1 variation (150 seconds variation) during a time-saving game A specific period total number of rounds suggestion display mode (indicated by a dotted circle in FIG. 18(b)) that suggests the total number of rounds in the jackpot game period that can be executed in ).

By executing the jackpot effect configured in this way, the player can obtain the special figure 2 reserved ball number displayed in the main reserved pattern display area Dm5 and the specific period total round displayed in the round number display area Dm6. The player can enjoy the jackpot game while predicting the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed in the future while watching the number suggestive display mode.

Furthermore, as described above, the round number display area Dm6 displays the confirmed execution round number display mode and the running round display mode. Among the total number of rounds that may be executed (the number of rounds displayed as a specific period total number of rounds suggested display mode) or the number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed (executed confirmed round number display mode), The player can easily grasp where it is. Therefore, it is possible to easily predict the number of remaining rounds to be executed within a specific period.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18(b), the display of the number of consecutive villas indicating the number of jackpots executed during the consecutive villa mode is "Charge bonus 1st time". Displays the number of consecutive games (number of consecutive games within a specific period) that is executed based on the jackpot rights acquired in the above-mentioned specific period (special figure 1 variation (150-second variation) during time-saving games) Alternatively, both the display of the number of consecutive residences and the display of the number of consecutive residences within a specific period may be displayed. A means for calculating the number of times the special figure 1 variation (150-second variation) is executed during the time-saving game is provided, and the total number of jackpots during the continuous mode, the number of times of rushing in a specific period, and execution within one specific period By configuring in this way, not only can the user enjoy the display mode during the jackpot game, but also the game status of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped and the future game can be played. Furthermore, after calculating the number of times described above, the average number of jackpot wins within a specific period performed within one specific period may be displayed.

By displaying the average number of jackpots in the specific period, if the average number of jackpots in the specific period is low, whether the lottery result of the normal pattern is biased to the deviation, or the through which is the condition for executing the lottery of the normal pattern. It is possible to refer to future games while analyzing possible causes such as whether the number of balls passing through the gate 67 was small.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a display mode (1 round, 1 display mode) corresponding to the number of rounds is displayed as a display mode displayed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm6. The display mode displayed in the area Dm6 is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the player can predict the number of rounds. For example, the size and color of the display mode may be varied according to a predetermined rule in correspondence with the number of rounds.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, "ROUND1" is displayed as the number of rounds indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot that is currently being executed. Instead, the number of rounds may be added to the jackpot game executed within a specific period and displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily comprehend and store the game results during the consecutive villa mode. In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, "5, 10, 20" indicating the number of times a plurality of jackpot games are executed within a specific period are displayed.

When the second jackpot game is started by the time-saving variation (special figure 2 variation) executed after the jackpot game shown in FIG. The display screen inside is displayed. As shown in FIG. 19(a), when the second jackpot game is started, the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 displays a display mode indicating that the number of remaining reserved memories is "0". In the main display area Dm, "charge bonus 2nd time" is displayed as the display of the number of consecutive games to indicate that the current jackpot is the second jackpot in the consecutive game mode. Then, in the round number display area Dm6, the execution confirmed round number display mode for a total of 20 rounds is displayed. That is, in FIG. 18(b), the number of rounds displayed as the specific period total number of rounds suggestion display mode is changed to the number of executed rounds display mode by executing the jackpot game (second time) this time. ing. In this way, by changing the specific period total number of rounds suggestion display mode to the execution fixed round number display mode, the player can be made to play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, in order to notify the number of rounds of the current jackpot game, the number of rounds displayed as the specific period total number of rounds suggestion display mode Although the number corresponding to the number of rounds of the game is configured to be variable to the execution confirmed round number display mode, other configurations may be used. For example, at the timing when the jackpot game starts, the execution confirmed round number display Displaying the mode as it is, when a predetermined condition (for example, execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the jackpot game or reaching the third round of the jackpot game) is established during the jackpot game, The number-of-rounds suggestion display mode may be changed to the number-of-executed-rounds display mode. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the presentation in order to grasp the number of rounds to be executed even during the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the specific period total round number suggestion display mode is changed to the execution fixed round number display mode, but other configurations may be used, for example, the specific period total round number suggestion display mode. may be changed to the execution fixed round number display mode, or the specific period total round number indication display mode may be changed to the execution fixed round number display mode at a plurality of timings during the jackpot game. can be As a result, it is possible to execute a big win game while always giving a feeling of anticipation.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19(b) to 20(b), the remaining period of the time saving state (time saving state in which the special figure 1 variation is executed) (remaining variation period of special figure 1) is a predetermined condition ( 10 seconds remaining) will be described. This performance display (battle performance) is a performance for notifying the player that the consecutive villa mode will end when there is no reserved memory of the special figure 2 when the time saving state ends. As described above, this battle effect is executed when the remaining period of the time saving state is within 10 seconds and the special figure 2 reservation is "0". Then, during this battle production, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is generated, the battle victory production for indicating that the consecutive villa mode continues is executed. (See FIG. 20(a)) If the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 during this battle effect, a battle defeat effect is executed to indicate that the consecutive villa mode will continue (see FIG. 20(a)). See FIG. 20(b)). In addition, in this embodiment, when the battle effect is executed, the effect of finally losing the battle is set. This is because the period of the battle production is set to a period (10 seconds) in which the normal pattern fluctuation can be changed 3 or 4 times, and the probability of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the battle production is This is because it is lower than the probability that the ball will not enter the second ball entrance 640 during the battle production. That is, it is possible to reduce the processing load because it is only necessary to execute the control to change the content of the effect only when an event with a low probability occurs.

In addition, in this embodiment, although it is configured so that the effect result of the battle effect is changed depending on whether or not the special figure 2 is reserved, other elements may be included. For example, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 fluctuating during the time saving is a big hit, the battle victory effect may be executed at the timing when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected presentation to the player who predicts the outcome of the battle presentation based only on the contents of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 (presence or absence of storage).

In this embodiment, at the timing when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 occurs, the display mode of the main reserved design display area Dm5 is updated. Even if the reserved memory occurs, the display mode of the main reserved pattern display area Dm5 may not be updated, or the main reserved pattern display area Dm5 may not be displayed when the battle performance is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 while the battle performance is being executed, and to enhance the performance effect of the battle performance. can be done.

In addition, based on the winning information of the normal symbols that are retained and stored, it is possible to determine whether the normal symbols are correct or not, and change the contents of the battle production (opponent, attack order, attack type, etc.) based on the determination result. should be configured to This allows the player to pay attention to the content of the battle presentation. Further, a privilege effect may be provided that is executed only when a plurality of special figure 2 reserves are obtained during the battle effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21(a), the contents of the effect executed when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired to the upper limit during the special figure 1 time saving variation will be described. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired to the upper limit, the special figure 2 reservation is stored to the upper limit (4 pieces) in the main reserved design display area Dm5 (display mode with four black circles in the figure). And, in the central part of the first display area Dm, a message for congratulating the fact that the special figure 2 hold has reached the upper limit is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 21(b), in the first display area Dm, a privilege effect (a lively effect using a character) that is irrelevant to the lottery result of each symbol is executed.

In the first sub-display area Ds1, characters "?" that hide the remaining period of the time period are displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp in which game state the period during which the above-described privilege effect is being executed.

Here, during the special figure 1 time reduction fluctuation, the lottery of normal patterns is repeatedly performed, and by winning the winning of the normal pattern, the electric accessory 640a is opened and the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Then, a game is executed to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol. While such a game is being executed, the player pays most attention to the lottery result of the normal symbol, so the normal symbol main symbol Dmc is displayed as the main symbol of the third symbol display device 81 ( (See FIG. 15 (b)), as shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the special figure 2 hold is stored up to the upper limit (4 pieces), it is no longer possible to store the special figure 2 hold , the player does not need to pay attention to whether or not the normal symbol has been won. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 21(a), the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn3 as the secondary symbol.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the display of the third symbol corresponding to the symbol that the player does not pay attention to as the main symbol. In addition, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience caused when the normal pattern main symbol Dmc is displayed in the state of FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, description will be given of the effect content when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) executed in the normal state of the game wins a small hit. FIG. 22(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen immediately after the start of the small winning game, and FIG. 22(b) shows a specific timing (the second variable winning device 650 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen at (opening timing of ).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the small winning game based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. This pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed to suggest the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game, and in the sub display area Ds, " If the symbols (pseudo main symbols Dmb) are aligned, the characters "chance" are displayed (see FIG. 22(a)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 22(b), when the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stop-displayed in a predetermined stop display mode ("444" in FIG. 22(b)), it is displayed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm. A guidance display mode is displayed to guide the player to the game aiming at the second variable prize winning device 650, and characters of "Aim for V" for explaining the game content are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small winning game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is variably displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 is the first. 1 display area Dm. As a result, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650, which is executed multiple times during the small winning game, can be made to appear to be executed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

Also, in the state where the small winning game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the main reserved design for displaying the number of reserved designs in an emphasized manner to the player is not displayed on the third design display device 81. Configure. As a result, based on the variable display of the pseudo-main pattern unrelated to each pattern (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, normal pattern), the reserved pattern display indicating the number of reserved storage of each pattern described above is not changed. It can be made difficult for the player to notice. As a configuration other than this, the third symbol display device 81 may display a pseudo reserved design display (pseudo reserved main design) which is variable based on the variable display of the pseudo main design Dmb.

Furthermore, during the small winning game, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is changed from the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650, and a variable display is also executed in which the stop display mode (for example, a breakout) is displayed to indicate a failure. be done. As a result, even when the opening timing interval of the second variable winning device 650 is wide, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be continuously variably displayed. In addition, in the pseudo main symbol Dmb stopped and displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650, the stop display mode is changed so that the opening timing of the corresponding second variable winning device 650 is advantageous to the player. It is configured to vary depending on whether or not the timing (opening timing at which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)). As the display mode, a display mode in which specific identical numbers are stopped, such as "777", is set. As a result, the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 and the degree of advantage of the opening timing can be grasped by the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb executed during the small winning game. It is possible to make the user interested in the performance display contents.

Next, referring to FIG. 23(a), an error display displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when a right-handed game is performed in a normal state in which a left-handed game is performed. As shown in FIG. 23(a), in the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed, when it is determined that the right-handed game is performed, the main symbols displayed in the first display area Dm are covered. A notification display area Dm7 is formed as shown in FIG. This allows the player to correct the game content.

In the present embodiment, the error display in FIG. 23(a) is when it is detected that a right-handed game has been executed (a ball has passed through the through gate 67) during a normal state in which a left-handed game is executed. However, the ball passes through the through gate 67 immediately after shifting from the time-saving state to the normal state among the states in which the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed is set as the game state. Even if it detects that the Specifically, just before moving from the time-saving state to the normal state (just before the end of the time-saving state), the variation period of the normal pattern that was started, and the variation (lottery) result is electric During the operation period of the accessory 640a or for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the end of the time saving state, it is preferable to set a grace period during which no error display is performed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress execution of error display even if a ball shot into the game area just before the time saving state ends passes through the through gate 67 after the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who has been actively playing the game until just before the end of the time-saving state from losing his/her desire to play.

In the case of using such a configuration, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the above-described grace period, it is preferable to execute a privilege effect that is different from usual. , it is preferable to execute a resurrection effect indicating that a state advantageous to the player (Renso mode) has revived. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23(b), display contents displayed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state will be described. FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the electric accessary product opening operation (during long opening) in the time saving state. In this embodiment, by continuing the right-handed game during the time saving state, if the electric accessory 640a is in the long open, the ball can be immediately entered into the second ball entrance 640. A game board 13 is configured in the . Also, the long-opened electric accessory 640a is set to open for 3 seconds as a first open period, followed by a closed period of 5 seconds, and then another open period of 3 seconds (second open period).

The display screen shown in FIG. 23(b) is displayed when the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 during the first opening period during the opening operation (during long opening) of the electric accessory 640a. It is what is done. In other words, if a right-handed game is normally played, the ball is surely entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the first open period. If the ball is not entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the open period, it is conceivable that a normal right-handed game is not being executed. Is displayed.

In this embodiment, even if the right-handed game is started after seeing the content displayed in the notification display area Dm7, each period is set so that the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 during the second open period. is set. Specifically, it is designed so that the period from when the ball is shot in a right-handed game to when the ball reaches the second ball entrance 640 (electric accessory 640a) is about 2 seconds. The closed period provided between the first open period (3 seconds) and the second open period (3 seconds) is set to be 5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 by playing a right-handed game within three seconds after the start of the closing period.

In this embodiment, the first open period and the second open period are set to the same number of seconds, and the means for measuring the elapsed period of the first open period and the means for measuring the elapsed period of the second open period For example, the second open period may be set longer than the first open period. As a result, the ball can be more reliably entered into the second ball entrance 640 when a right-handed game is played based on the display for prompting right-handed hitting being displayed in the notification display area Dm7. can.

Also, in this embodiment, the closed period is set to 5 seconds, but a longer closed period (for example, 30 seconds) may be set. In this case, as a condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, if the right-handed game is normally executed, the number of balls that can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the first opening period ( For example, one (1) ball entry may be the termination condition. As a result, even if the closing period executed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (the closing period executed after the first opening period elapses) is lengthened, the player who normally plays the right-handed game In other words, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be finished before the closing period is executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery of the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 24, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). First hit type counter C2 used for , stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, small hit type counter C5 used for selecting the small hit type (small hit pattern), and used for selecting the variation pattern and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 53). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the first ball entrance 64 (left first ball entrance 64a, right first ball entrance 64b (hereinafter both are referred to as first ball entrance 64). ))) and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for the winning of the second ball opening 640 are provided. there is In this embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each provided with up to four held balls, and a total of up to eight held balls can be stored. Therefore, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a special symbol lottery period, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value changes to the special symbol. It is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are executed for this purpose. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. Various settings and control processing are executed.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the reserved number (the number of reserved storage) is set to 4 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the upper limit of the reserved number corresponding to each symbol is , different values may be set, or only one special symbol may be reserved.

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or during the jackpot game with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, during the period when the special symbol lottery is impossible, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or When the second ball entrance 640 wins, if the number of pending balls for the winning ball entrance (starting hole) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value can be obtained. and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning entrance. Also, if the number of pending balls for the winning ball entrance is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value etc. is not acquired and prize balls (5 in this embodiment) Prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of held balls is set to four for each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but is not limited to this, and is less than four (for example, 3), or more than 4 (eg, 8). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 299. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 53).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a big hit defined in 202a, it is determined as a special symbol big win.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, the first random number table 202a includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the first special symbol lottery and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the second special symbol lottery. In the lottery for the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0". Also, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small winning.

On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C1 is "0". Also, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "1 to 299", and if it is "1 to 299", it is determined to be a small winning.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. FIG. As described above, there is one value of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot, and the random value "0" is stored in the first winning random number table 202a as described above. In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 300, the total number of random number numbers that result in a big win is 1, so the probability of a big win in the special symbol is "1/300". In addition, the value of the first random number counter C1 that becomes a small hit in the first special symbol is 3, and the value of the first random number counter C1 that becomes a small hit in the second special symbol is 299. Therefore, the first The probability of a small win for the special symbol is "1/100", and the probability of a small win for the second special symbol is "299/300".

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 27(a)). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol is different from the symbol on which the ready-to-win is applied. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected, namely, "reach out" (for example, range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops and "complete loss" (for example, range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment). It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into normal state and time saving state, and the range of random numbers set for each out-of-stop stop type is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state with special symbols or in the time-saving state.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the set variation pattern selection table by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 53), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30) storing a random number for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30). A plurality of variation pattern tables respectively corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set in the variation pattern table 202d, and variation patterns corresponding to each of the game state and the success/failure determination result are set in the variation pattern table 202d. A table is set. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is detected, and stored in the normal pattern execution area of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is defined in the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 26(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the value of the winning random number defined in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). For example, in the second winning random number table 202c, there are 12 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "0 to 11". The total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that will be a win is 12. ”.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal state and the time-saving state can be set as the game state, and depending on the game state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the second when the normal symbol hits. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the ball entrance 640 is made different, and the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the time-saving state than in the normal state. As a result, when the game state is the normal state, a game (left-handed game) aiming at the first ball entrance 64 (left first ball entrance 64a) is performed, and when the game state is the time-saving state. , the second ball entrance 640 can be played (right-handed game).

In the normal state, when the ball passes through the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal design is performed on the second design display device 83 for 4 seconds. be. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the electric accessory 640a is opened (short-circuited) only for "0.1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the time saving state, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, the variable display of the normal design is executed for 3 seconds on the second design display device 83, and the acquired value of the second random number counter C4. is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined to be won, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). , the electric accessory 640a is opened (long opening) only for "3 seconds x 2 times". Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the value of the first per random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the lottery for the normal symbol is executed) and the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 The electric accessory 640a is configured to open for a long time only when both the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is in the time saving state, but other configurations may be used. For example, if the timing at which the value of the first per random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the lottery for normal symbols is executed) is in a time-saving state, the timing at which the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends Even if (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened for a long time, and the value of the first winning random number counter C4 is acquired. Even if the timing (the timing at which the lottery for the normal symbol is executed) is in the normal state, the timing at which the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) In the time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be long-released.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see 53).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. The RAM 203 stores various counters shown in FIG. 24, the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, etc., a stack area, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 53) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 52) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, the contents of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. FIG. FIG. 25(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, a fluctuation pattern table 202d, and a small winning type selection table 202e.

Next, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIGS. 26(a) to 26(c). As shown in FIG. 26(a), the first random number table 202a includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the first special symbol lottery and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the second special symbol lottery. is stipulated.

Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, as shown in FIG. Based on, in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be hit is set. In the lottery for the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0". Also, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small winning. Otherwise, if the value is determined to be "4 to 299", it is determined to be out of range.

On the other hand, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, as shown in FIG. ) is set. In the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0". Also, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "1 to 299", and if it is "1 to 299", it is determined to be a small winning.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 26(d)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 26(d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 11, the normal symbol wins. be judged.

Incidentally, when it is determined that the hit of the normal symbol, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol of "○" is illuminated and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory. 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

Here, the electric accessory 640a in this embodiment moves in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z), not shown, as described above with reference to FIG. This electric accessory 640a functions to guide the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by moving forward (opening action). On the other hand, the retracting motion (closing motion) to the rear prevents the ball from being guided to the second ball entrance 640 (the ball is not entered).

Although details will be described later, the electric accessory 640a in this embodiment is opened again for 3 seconds after a 3-second open period (first open period) in the time-saving state, after a 5-second closed period. When the opening operation (long opening) in which the period (second opening period) is set is executed and it is not in the time saving state (in the normal state), after the opening period (first opening period) of 0.1 seconds, After a closing period of 0.1 seconds, an opening operation (short opening) is performed in which an opening period (second opening period) of 0.1 seconds is set again. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 even though the time saving state is not in effect (normal state is in effect).

In addition, the electric accessory 640a in this embodiment is designed so that, when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the conditions for terminating the opening operation are satisfied and the opening operation is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second ball entrance 640 by a single opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. Since it is possible to suppress the situation where a plurality of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 at once, a plurality of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 by one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Ball can be made more controllable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27(a), details of the first winning type selection table 202b will be described. FIGS. 27A to 27C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b.

In the first winning type selection table 202b, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, or the small winning of the first special symbol is won, and the ball is in the specific area (V winning prize switch 650e3 (Fig. 5)))) and a special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 for selecting the jackpot type when passing, and when winning the second special symbol jackpot, or when winning the second special symbol jackpot, It has a special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2 for selecting the jackpot type when the ball passes through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3 (see FIG. 5)) during the jackpot game (FIG. 27 ( a) see).

As shown in FIG. 27(b), at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 79", the jackpot A (7R time-saving jackpot) is selected, and "580 ~99”, the jackpot D (16R time-saving no jackpot) is selected. Also, at the time of the small hit of the first special symbol, a big hit type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, when the small win type is a small win A, a big win C (7R short time with big win) is selected, and in the case of a small win B, a big win D (2R short time no big win) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27(c), at the time of the second special pattern jackpot, regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2 (when the value is "0 to 99") jackpot E (15R time-saving jackpot ) is selected. Also, at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol, a big hit type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, if the small hit type is a small hit C, the big hit F (5R time saving big hit) is selected, and if the small hit D is a big hit G (10R time saving big hit) is selected, and if the small hit E , jackpot E (15R time-saving jackpot) is selected.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in each of the above-described jackpot types, when "time saving with jackpot" is selected, after the jackpot game is completed, the time saving state of "time saving once" is provided. However, the number of times of time saving given after the end of the jackpot game is not limited to this, and the number of times may be set to two or more times, or a different number of times of time saving state is selected based on the selected jackpot type. You may do so. In addition, a different number of time-saving states may be selected based on the selected jackpot type and the gaming state set at the time when the jackpot is won (the ball passes through the specific area). Based on the number of times "existing jackpot" is continuously selected, different times of time saving states may be selected based on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, in addition to the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, etc.), the content of the privilege (the number of times of the time saving state) given after the jackpot game is completed can be changed. It is possible to motivate a person to play the game while expecting what kind of privilege (shortening of working hours) will be given after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by performing the variation of the special symbol for the preset number of times of time saving, the time saving end condition that the time saving state ends is set, but the time saving end condition different from the present embodiment may be set, for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol may be measured, and different end conditions may be set for each special symbol variation. Specifically, as the time-saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 4 times, or the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol is 1 time. The time-saving end condition may be set such that the total number of variations with two special symbols is four times, or the number of variations with the second special symbol is one.

In addition to that, every time the variation of the special pattern is executed, a lottery as to whether or not to end the time saving state may be executed, and the time saving state may be ended based on the lottery result, or the special pattern is predetermined. The time saving state may be ended when the symbol is stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to complicately set the timing at which the time saving state ends, and to make the player playing the time saving game expect the time saving state to continue for a long time while playing the game. can be done. In this case, it is preferable to notify the player of at least a part of the period during which the time saving does not end. As a result, the player can grasp a part of the period during which the time saving will not end, and the player can play the game without anxiety during the period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the content of the small hit classification selection table 202e is demonstrated. 28(a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

The small winning type selection table 202e includes a special symbol 1 small winning selection table 202e1 for selecting the small winning type when winning the small winning of the first special symbol, and a special symbol 1 small winning selection table 202e1 for selecting the small winning type when winning the small winning of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol 2 small winning selection table 202e2 for selecting the small winning type (see FIG. 28(a)).

As shown in FIG. 28(b), when the first special symbol is won, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 10", the small hit A (V passable) is selected, " In the case of 11 to 99”, a small hit B (V pass impossible) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28(c), when the second special symbol is won, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 9", the small hit C (V passable) is selected, In the case of "10 to 24", a small hit D (V passable) is selected, and in the case of "25 to 99", a small hit E (V passable) is selected.

In this embodiment, the operations of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 are set according to the type of small winning. Specifically, in the small winning games of A and C to E, the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is operating, and the ball can enter the special discharge flow path 650e2. there is On the other hand, in the small winning game by the small winning B, the passage solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is not operating. A ball cannot enter the special discharge channel 650e2. That is, the small hits A and C to E are the small hits in which the ball is then passed through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3) and a big win game can be given, and the small win B is a small win in which no big win is given. .

In addition, in the small winning game by small winning A and B (small winning type selected by winning the small winning of the first special symbol), the V entrance solenoid 209a operates so that the opening and closing door 650f is opened for a short period of time (Fig. 10 See), in the small winning game by small winning C to E (small winning type selected by winning the small winning of the second special symbol), the V entrance solenoid 209a operates so that the opening and closing door 650f is opened for a long period of time (Fig. 11). That is, the small wins A and B are small wins in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game, and the small wins C to E are the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game. It is a small hit that makes it easy for the ball to enter.

In this control example, the type of the jackpot to be given after that is determined according to the type of the small hit, and the jackpot given after the small hit A is the jackpot C (7R time-saving jackpot), and the small hit B. The jackpot given later will be the jackpot D (2R time-saving no jackpot), the jackpot given after the small win C will be the jackpot F (5R time-saving jackpot), and the jackpot given after the small win D will be the jackpot G (10R It is structured so that the big win given after the small win E is the big win E (15R time-saving big win).

In addition, in this control example, the type of the jackpot to be given after that is determined according to the type of the small hit, but as other specifications, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the type of the jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the right of the jackpot is acquired), and in the subsequent jackpot game, the ball passes through the V prize switch 650e3 to execute the jackpot that has just been acquired. may By doing so, the player can select a small win to be passed through the V winning switch 650e3, and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, a predetermined lottery may be executed based on the ball passing through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3) during the small winning game, and the type of big winning may be determined based on the result of the lottery. good. As a result, the content of the big win game to be executed can be changed according to the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area, so that the player can enthusiastically play the small win game, and the interest in the game can be improved. can.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display form (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern, and the display form is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. This variation pattern table 202d defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the types of special symbols, lottery results, and game states.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(a), a special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d1, a special figure 1 off (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, and a special figure 1 small per variation pattern table 202d3 And, at least a special figure 1 time saving variation pattern table 202d4 and a special figure 2 variation pattern table 202d5 are defined.

First, with reference to FIG. 29(b), the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d will be described. This special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 selects the variation pattern (variation time) in the case of winning the jackpot from among the variation patterns (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state. Random value (counter value of variation type counter value CS1) for determining the type of variation pattern (variation time) is defined.

Specifically, when the jackpot is determined as the stop type, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value of "51 to 179". The variation pattern of super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the range, and the variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with the range of "180 to 198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 29(c), the contents of the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for special figure 1 out will be described. This special figure 1 out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is, when the lottery result of special figure 1 is out of the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state A random value (counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) for determining the variation pattern (variation time) in is defined.

Specifically, when complete deviation is determined as the stop type, a short deviation (7 seconds) variation pattern is associated with the range of "0 to 98" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and "99 to 198” is associated with a variation pattern of long deviation (10 seconds). In addition, when the first special symbol lottery is lost and the stop reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 149" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , various types of super reach (60 seconds) are associated with the range of "150 to 197", and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with "198".

Next, referring to FIG. 29(d), the contents of the special figure 1 small per variation pattern table 202d3 will be described. This special figure 1 small per variation pattern table 202d3 is the first special symbol ( Among the variation patterns (variation time) of special figure 1), a random value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the lottery result of special figure 1 is a small hit (counter value of variation type counter value CS1 ) are stipulated.

Specifically, when the small hit is determined as the stop type, regardless of the small hit type (small hit A, small hit B) and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, various types of super reach (60 seconds) are mapped.

As described above, in the present embodiment, based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, various variation patterns are configured to be selected corresponding to each stop type. is set to be easily selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, if the variable display continues for a long time, the player may have won the jackpot. I will play the game while expecting. Therefore, the game result can be predicted by the set period length of the variation pattern, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30(a), the contents of the special figure 1 time-saving variation pattern table 202d4 will be described. This special figure 1 time saving variation pattern table 202d42 has a random value (counter value of variation type counter value CS1) for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the time saving state stipulated.

Specifically, the variation pattern for 150 seconds is associated regardless of the determined stop type and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

FIG. 30(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation pattern table 202d5. This special figure 2 variation pattern table 202d5 defines a random value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the normal state and the time saving state.

Specifically, if the determined stop type is a jackpot, a short jackpot (7 seconds) is set regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, and if the determined stop type is a small hit, the variation type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, a short win (2 seconds) is associated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25(b), the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 25(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 25(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, time saving medium counter 203g, jackpot start flag 203h, jackpot medium flag 203i, small hit start flag 203j, small hit medium flag 203k, V passage time jackpot type storage area 203m , V flag 203n, retention cancellation flag 203p, cancellation counter 203qa, time saving flag 203q, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a first per random number counter. Each value of C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small per type counter C5 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 and C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four reserves. Among the vacant areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas. Each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Among the areas in which the data is stored, the areas having the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to move winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of times of waiting) of variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. It is incremented by 1 (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 38).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 38). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended in the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203d is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is affected by noise etc. Even if there is a deviation from the number of held balls in the actual variation display that has been held, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of times of waiting) of variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second ball inlet 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. It is incremented by 1 (see S710 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 38). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. See S1104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S905 in FIG. 45).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding variable display in normal symbols M) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1105 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1103 in FIG. 47: No ).

The time-saving medium counter 203g is a counter for counting the remaining time-short period (variation number of special symbols) in the normal-time-shortening state (time-saving state). This time-saving medium counter 203g is set to 1 at the end of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is other than "jackets B, D" (that is, "jackets A, C, E to G") (see S1815 in FIG. 54). . That is, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state is provided after the jackpot game, the time saving state is provided once.

The jackpot start flag 203h is a flag used for determining whether or not it is time to start a jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38), and the jackpot start timing in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54). (See S1801 in FIG. 54), and is set to OFF when it is determined that it is time to start the big win in the jackpot control process (See S1802 in FIG. 54). As a result, it is possible to execute a process according to the timing of the start of the jackpot. In each of the control examples described above, although illustration is omitted, the jackpot start timing is determined in the same manner.

The jackpot in-progress flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress, that is, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. Like the above-described jackpot start flag 203h, the jackpot middle flag 203i is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38). Then, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54), it is referred to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S1805 in FIG. 54), and in the jackpot control process, it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot. is set to off (see S1813 in FIG. 54).

The small hit start flag 203j is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit. This small hit start flag 203j is set to ON in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). (See S610 in FIG. 42). Then, it is referred to determine whether it is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) (see S1901 in FIG. 55), and is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control process is set to OFF (see S1902 in FIG. 55).

The small hitting medium flag 203k is a flag used for determining whether or not the small hitting is in progress, that is, whether or not the small hitting game is being executed. This small hitting medium flag 203k is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process (see FIG. 42), like the small hitting start flag 203j described above (see S610 in FIG. 42). Then, in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), it is referred to determine whether or not it is during the small hit (S1906 in FIG. 55), and it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit in the small hit control process. is set to off (S1911 in FIG. 55).

The V passing time jackpot type storage area 203m is an area for storing the jackpot type corresponding to the small hit type of the small hit won when the small hit is won, and the ball is in the specific area during the small hit game state. The type of jackpot executed based on passing through is stored. In this V passage time jackpot type storage area 203m, a jackpot type corresponding to the winning small hit type is set in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) (see S608 in FIG. 42), and V passage processing (see FIG. 50) ), the set jackpot type is read (see S1401 in FIG. 50), and the corresponding V flag is set to ON (see S1401 in FIG. 50).

The V flag 203n is a flag for storing that the ball has passed through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650, and sets the big winning type based on the value of this V flag 203n at the end of the small winning game. It is. This V flag 203n is set based on the value of the V passing time jackpot type in the V passing process (see FIG. 50) (S1402 in FIG. 50), and is referred to in the small hitting end process (S2003, S2004 in FIG. 56), After that, it is set to OFF (S2006 in FIG. 56).

The retention release flag 203p is a flag used to indicate a period during which the retention valve 750a of the retention device 750 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is released (opened). The storage device 750 enters the storage state when the state is released and set to off. This retention cancellation flag 203p is set to ON (S1804 in FIG. 54) when it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) (S1801 in FIG. 54: YES), and the storage device It is referred to in the control process (see FIG. 58) (see S2202 in FIG. 58), and when the value of the release counter 203Pa reaches the upper limit (25000) (see S2205 in FIG. 58), it is set to OFF (see S2205 in FIG. 58). of S2208). That is, in the present embodiment, the retention device 750 is released at the timing when the jackpot game is started (the retention valve 750a is opened), and when a predetermined period of time (10 seconds) elapses, the retention state is entered (the retention valve 750a is closed). As a result, it is possible to increase the benefits given to the player when the player wins the jackpot.

As a configuration for varying the state of the storage device 750 (storage state, release state), a configuration other than the present embodiment may be used. It may be possible to set a jackpot that does not shift to the canceled state depending on the selected jackpot type, or a plurality of winning ports (for example, the first specific winning port 65 and the second specific winning port 650) can be set in advance. When a jackpot game is executed in the order of opening, the storage device 750 may be shifted to the release state at the timing when a specific winning opening is opened.

Further, with respect to the configuration for shifting the storage device 750 from the release state to the storage state (the termination condition of the release state), in the present embodiment, the release state is terminated when 10 seconds have passed since the release state was entered. Even if the ball is not stored in the storage device 750, the ball can pass through the storage device 750. Only stored balls may be allowed to pass through the storage device 750 . As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to accumulate the balls in the accumulation device 750 before the release condition (big win) of the accumulation device 750 is established.

The release counter 203pa is a counter for measuring the period during which the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 is released (opened). The release counter 203pa is set to "1" (see S2202 in FIG. 58) when it is determined in the storage device control process (see FIG. 58) that the storage release flag 203p is set to ON (see S2202 in FIG. 58). S2204), thereafter, every time the storage device control process is executed, the value is incremented by 1 (see S2206 in FIG. 58). Then, it is determined whether the value of the counter has reached "25000" (see 2205 in FIG. 58), and based on the determination result, the variable operation of the reservoir valve 750a is controlled, and the reservoir valve 750a is variably controlled to the closed state. Then, the value of release counter 203Pa is set to "0" (see S2209 in FIG. 58).

The winning flag 203q during time saving is a flag for indicating in which game state the lottery (normal drawing lottery) of the normal pattern in which the lottery result is a win is executed, and when the lottery is executed during the time saving state, set to on. This time-saving middle hit flag 203q is referred to when setting the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is executed based on the hit of the normal drawing lottery.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the first specific winning opening 65a, A solenoid 209 for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205 .

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 7 and 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 7) circuit 253. FIG.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, and turns on and off the lamp display device 227 (a decorative lamp 227a, a transmission lamp 227b, other lamps 227c, etc.), and changes It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display effect (variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 31(a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine more detailed variations. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting the effect state for setting the display mode of the effect image (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the establishment state of various flags, and the lottery results of special symbols and ordinary symbols.

Here, the contents of the rendering state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 32(a). FIG. 32(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the rendering state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32( a ), the effect state selection table 222 b includes the state of establishment of the continuous flag 223 i, the normal pattern effective flag 223 q, the pseudo effect flag 223 r, and the special 2 fluctuation flag 223 s (set to ON, OFF ), one of the rendering states "1" to "6" is selected.

Specifically, in a state where the flag 223i is set to be off, the effect state "1" is selected when the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to be off. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state "2" is selected. In addition, in the state where the flag 223i is set to ON during the consecutive houses and the normal pattern effective flag 223q is set to OFF, if the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to OFF, the production state "3" selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON, the production state "4" is selected. Then, when the continuous game flag 223i is set to ON and the normal pattern effective flag 223q is set to ON, the effect state "5" is selected. In the state where this production state "5" is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed and the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol (normal figure) are at a predetermined interval (special figure When the fluctuation stop timing of the normal pattern is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of 1 and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds, the effect state "6" is selected.

Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 32(b). FIG. 32(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the third symbols and reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that the object whose display mode is changed according to the set effect state is not only the above-described third symbol and reserved symbol, but also various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set in the effect state. Although it is changed to an effect image corresponding to , detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), the third pattern (main pattern) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 according to the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9). and the main reserved design (see FIG. 9) displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the third design display device 81 (first special design, second special design, normal design) are different from each other. stipulated in In this way, by varying the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main symbol and the main reserved symbol depending on the performance state, the pachinko machine 10 having a complicated game property can The result of the main game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner only by allowing the player to grasp the pattern and the main reserved pattern.

Specifically, when the production state "1" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is the main symbol, and the reservation for indicating the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). It should be noted that the effect state "1" is selected during the normal state in which the game state is a left-handed game.

Next, when the production state "2" is selected, the pseudo pattern for production that does not correspond to any pattern (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, normal pattern) becomes the main pattern (pseudo main pattern Dmb). , is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that no reserved symbol is displayed on the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 22(b)). It should be noted that the effect state "2" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the small winning game of the special figure 1 is executed.

The pseudo-main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol when the effect state "2" is selected is the same as the other main symbols. (b)) is executed, and in the small winning game of special figure 1, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is predetermined based on the timing when the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. (a mode in which the same symbols are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22(b)). Thus, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed to the player. The opening timing of the second specific prize winning port 650a during the winning game can be notified, and the privilege of opening the second specific prize winning port 650a can be given as a result of the variation (lottery) of the pseudo main pattern Dmb. be able to.

Further, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed is set to be at least greater than the number of times the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the small winning game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a. The variable display of the pseudo main symbols Dmb that are not displayed is controlled so as to be stop-displayed in a display mode other than a predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called split eyes)). ing. As a result, regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small winning game, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can always be variably displayed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the presentation state "2" is selected, the main reserved pattern is not displayed, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend the variation of the pseudo main pattern Dmb and the increase/decrease relation of the reserved pattern. In other words, since the pseudo-main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each of the actually reserved and stored symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure), when the pseudo-main symbol Dmb is started to be displayed, , There is no increase or decrease in the number of any of the reserved designs (special figure 1 reserved design, special figure 2 reserved design, general figure reserved design). Therefore, in the production state "2" in which the pseudo main pattern Dmb is variably displayed, one of the reserved patterns (special figure 1 reserved pattern, special figure 2 reserved pattern, general figure reserved pattern) is displayed as the main reserved pattern. As a result, when the main symbols start to fluctuate, the main reserved symbols do not decrease, causing a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that the occurrence of the above situation can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved symbols are configured not to be displayed, but other configurations may be used. A pseudo main reserved symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to increase or decrease the number of pseudo main reserved symbols corresponding to the variable display of the pseudo main symbols Dmb. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the pseudo main symbols without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, when the pseudo main reserved symbols are displayed, the number and display mode of the pseudo main reserved symbols to be displayed may be set based on the type of the small winning game to be executed. By configuring in this way, the content of the current small winning game is predicted to the player by the pseudo main reserved pattern displayed as the main reserved pattern at the timing when the small winning game in which the performance state "2" is selected is started. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy playing the small winning game.

In addition, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning hole 650a opens is a display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed. Display control is performed so that the types of the same symbols that are stopped and displayed are different based on the content of the privilege given by the ball that is played. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a, which is opened at the timing when the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). The stop display mode is a display mode (for example, "777") in which a specific same number is displayed stopped, and the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning port 650a that is opened at other timings. A display mode (for example, "444") different from the specific same number is used as the stop display mode. As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number to notify the player of the opening timing of the second specific prize winning port 650a, and furthermore, depending on the type of the stopped and displayed number, the bonus to be given is notified. Contents can be reported (suggested). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance using the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

Next, when the production state "3" is selected, the pseudo pattern for production that does not correspond to any of the patterns (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, normal pattern) becomes the main pattern (pseudo main pattern Dmb). In the main reserved design, the reserved design corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third design display device 81 as the main reserved design (see FIG. 16(b)). It should be noted that the effect state "3" is selected when the game state is the time saving state and the small winning game is executed.

Next, when the production state "4" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main symbol (special figure 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main reserved symbol corresponds to the special figure 2. The symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 18(a)). It should be noted that the effect state "4" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the variation of the special figure 2 is executed.

Next, when the production state "5" is selected, the third pattern corresponding to the normal pattern becomes the main pattern (normal pattern main pattern Dmc), and the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 2 is the main reserved pattern. It is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15(b)). It should be noted that the effect state "5" is selected when the game state is the time saving state, and when the normal figure variation capable of executing the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed during the time saving state.

When the production state "6" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is the main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is the third main reserved symbol. It is displayed on the pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 17(a)). It should be noted that the effect state "6" is selected when the game state is a time-saving state and the normal pattern variation is started in a state in which the remaining variation period of the special figure 1 during variation is within 2 seconds.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 31(a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine more detailed variations. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting the effect state for setting the display mode of the effect image (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the establishment state of various flags, and the lottery results of special symbols and ordinary symbols.

Here, the contents of the rendering state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 32(a). FIG. 32(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the rendering state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32(a), the effect state selection table 222b has a establishment state (set to ON, is set to off), one of the effect states "1" to "6" is selected.

Specifically, in a state where the flag 223i is set to be off, the effect state "1" is selected when the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to be off. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state "2" is selected. In addition, in the state where the flag 223i is set to ON during the consecutive houses and the normal pattern effective flag 223q is set to OFF, if the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to OFF, the production state "3" selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON, the production state "4" is selected. Then, when the continuous game flag 223i is set to ON and the normal pattern effective flag 223q is set to ON, the effect state "5" is selected. In the state where this production state "5" is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed and the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol (normal figure) are at a predetermined interval (special figure When the fluctuation stop timing of the normal pattern is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of 1 and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds, the effect state "6" is selected.

Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 32(b). FIG. 32(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the third symbols and reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that the object whose display mode is changed according to the set effect state is not only the above-described third symbol and reserved symbol, but also various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set in the effect state. Although it is changed to an effect image corresponding to , detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), the third pattern (main pattern) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 according to the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9). and the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are defined to be different. In this way, by varying the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main symbol and the main reserved symbol depending on the performance state, the pachinko machine 10 having a complicated game property can The result of the main game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner only by allowing the player to grasp the pattern and the main reserved pattern.

Specifically, when the production state "1" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is the main symbol, and the reservation for indicating the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). It should be noted that the effect state "1" is selected during the normal state in which the game state is a left-handed game.

Next, when the production state "2" is selected, the pseudo pattern for production that does not correspond to any pattern (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, normal pattern) becomes the main pattern (pseudo main pattern Dmb). , is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that no reserved symbol is displayed on the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 22(b)). It should be noted that the effect state "2" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the small winning game of the special figure 1 is executed.

The pseudo-main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol when the effect state "2" is selected is the same as the other main symbols. (b)) is executed, and in the small winning game of special figure 1, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is predetermined based on the timing when the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. (a mode in which the same symbols are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22(b)). Thus, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed to the player. The opening timing of the second specific prize winning port 650a during the winning game can be notified, and the privilege of opening the second specific prize winning port 650a can be given as a result of the variation (lottery) of the pseudo main pattern Dmb. be able to.

Further, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed is set to be at least greater than the number of times the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the small winning game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a. The variable display of the pseudo main symbols Dmb that are not displayed is controlled so as to be stop-displayed in a display mode other than a predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called split eyes)). ing. As a result, regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small winning game, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can always be variably displayed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the presentation state "2" is selected, the main reserved pattern is not displayed, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend the variation of the pseudo main pattern Dmb and the increase/decrease relation of the reserved pattern. In other words, since the pseudo-main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each of the actually reserved and stored symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure), when the pseudo-main symbol Dmb is started to be displayed, , There is no increase or decrease in the number of any of the reserved designs (special figure 1 reserved design, special figure 2 reserved design, general figure reserved design). Therefore, in the production state "2" in which the pseudo main pattern Dmb is variably displayed, one of the reserved patterns (special figure 1 reserved pattern, special figure 2 reserved pattern, general figure reserved pattern) is displayed as the main reserved pattern. As a result, when the main symbols start to fluctuate, the main reserved symbols do not decrease, causing a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the rendering state "2" is selected, the main pending drawing is not displayed, so that the occurrence of the above situation can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, when the effect state "2" is selected, the main reserved symbols are configured not to be displayed, but other configurations may be used. A pseudo main reserved symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to increase or decrease the number of pseudo main reserved symbols corresponding to the variable display of the pseudo main symbols Dmb. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the pseudo main symbols without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, when the pseudo main reserved symbols are displayed, the number and display mode of the pseudo main reserved symbols to be displayed may be set based on the type of the small winning game to be executed. By configuring in this way, the content of the current small winning game is predicted to the player by the pseudo main reserved pattern displayed as the main reserved pattern at the timing when the small winning game in which the performance state "2" is selected is started. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy playing the small winning game.

In addition, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning hole 650a opens is a display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed. Display control is performed so that the types of the same symbols that are stopped and displayed are different based on the content of the privilege given by the ball that is played. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a, which is opened at the timing when the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). The stop display mode is a display mode (for example, "777") in which a specific same number is displayed stopped, and the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning port 650a that is opened at other timings. A display mode (for example, "444") different from the specific same number is used as the stop display mode. As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number to notify the player of the opening timing of the second specific prize winning port 650a, and furthermore, depending on the type of the stopped and displayed number, the bonus to be given is notified. Contents can be reported (suggested). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance using the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

Next, when the production state "3" is selected, the pseudo pattern for production that does not correspond to any of the patterns (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, normal pattern) becomes the main pattern (pseudo main pattern Dmb). In the main reserved design, the reserved design corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third design display device 81 as the main reserved design (see FIG. 16(b)). It should be noted that the effect state "3" is selected when the game state is the time saving state and the small winning game is executed.

Next, when the effect state "4" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main symbol (special figure 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main reserved symbol corresponds to the special figure 2. The symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 18(a)). It should be noted that the effect state "4" is selected when the game state is the normal state and the variation of the special figure 2 is executed.

Next, when the production state "5" is selected, the third pattern corresponding to the normal pattern becomes the main pattern (normal pattern main pattern Dmc), and the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 2 is the main reserved pattern. It is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15(b)). It should be noted that the effect state "5" is selected when the game state is the time saving state, and when the normal figure variation capable of executing the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed during the time saving state.

When the production state "6" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is the main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is the third main reserved symbol. It is displayed on the pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 16(b)). It should be noted that the effect state "6" is selected when the game state is a time-saving state and the normal pattern variation is started in a state in which the remaining variation period of the special figure 1 during variation is within 2 seconds.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 31(b). FIG. 31(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 has a special figure winning prize information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, Effect counter 223f, time saving medium flag 223g, time saving remaining period storage area 223h, continuous property flag 223i, fluctuating time counter 223j, state storage area 223k, effect state storage area 223m, special 2 suspension flag 223n And, special 2 pending upper limit flag 223p, general pattern valid flag 223q, pseudo production flag 223r, special 2 fluctuation flag 223s, general pattern winning prize information storage area 223t, general pattern fluctuation start flag 223u, replacement At least a flag 223v, a privilege effect execution flag 223w, an end effect execution flag 223x, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The special figure winning prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which has a special symbol (first special symbol and Winning information of the second special symbol) is stored respectively. From the information stored in the special figure winning prize information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are variable effects (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and are the main control. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is pending in the device 110 up to four times at maximum for each type of special symbol. The special design 1 reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the reserved ball number of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special design (special design 1), and the special design 2 reserved ball number counter 223c corresponds to the second special design (special design 2) Corresponds to the number of pending balls of the variable effect based on the lottery.

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 cannot get the value of Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls is counted based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c , The number of pending balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, the main controller 110 suspends the variable display by entering the first ball entrance 64 (the left first ball entrance 64a, the right first ball entrance 64b) and the second ball entrance 640. When the number of balls is added, or when the variation display in the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, after the addition or after the subtraction to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (see S3207 in FIG. 61). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are updated. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are used for the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of pending ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. , its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also changes while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. can be made Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display (the right of the symbol lottery) can be reserved (upper limit 4) for the normal symbols as well as the special symbols described above, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls of the main control device 110 When receiving a command set when the value of the counter 203f increases or decreases, it has a normal symbol holding ball number counter (not shown) as a counter for increasing or decreasing the value corresponding to the contents of the received command. However, the processing executed in the voice lamp control device 113 and the processing executed in the display control device 114 are different only in the target command for the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b described above. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted. The value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter is used, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of normal symbol reserved balls. The detailed contents of the case where the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are the same as the case of displaying the number of reserved balls of the special symbol described above on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, description thereof is omitted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the display control device 114, when receiving each reserved ball number command for display, received in a predetermined area (secondary reserved pattern display areas Dn4 to Dn6 (see FIG. 9 (a))) A display is made to indicate the number of pending balls corresponding to the command received, and a pending ball number command to be displayed in the main pending symbol display area is selected based on the received display effect state command, and is held as the main pending symbol. A display is made to indicate the number of balls. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 a display synchronized with the increase or decrease in the number of held balls set by the main control device 110, and to notify the player in the current effect state. The number of reserved balls of the pattern can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls of each pattern (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) in a predetermined area (secondary reserved symbol display areas Dn4 to Dn6 (Fig. 9 ( a) See))), and some of them can be displayed as main reserved symbols, but the method of displaying reserved symbols is not limited to this, for example, each symbol (special figure 1 , special figure 2, normal figure) is received, based on the received display effect state command, the reserved design (main reserved design) to be displayed in the main reserved design display area, and the slave A reserved pattern (secondary reserved pattern) to be displayed in the reserved pattern display area is discriminated, and a reservation corresponding to each pattern (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the discrimination result. A pattern may be displayed.

The special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command (for special figure) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3304 in FIG. 62), and the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 It is turned off when the setting is made (see S3702 in FIG. 66). When the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a special figure display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (see S3706 in FIG. 66).

The variation pattern command for special figure display set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output processing (see FIG. 60) of the main processing (S3102 , and transmitted to the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this special figure display variation pattern command, the variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this special figure display variation pattern command. As shown, the display control of the variable effect is started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the special figure display variation pattern command, the special figure 1 display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, and the special figure 2 display variation corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol A pattern command is configured so that it can be set. In the display control device 114, the variation pattern corresponding to the type of the received special figure display variation pattern command (special figure 1 display variation pattern command, special figure 2 display variation pattern command) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 It is configured to

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display variation pattern command is received in the display control device 114, in a predetermined area (symbol display areas Dn1 to Dn3 of the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9A)) A display is made to show a symbol row (variation pattern) corresponding to the received display variation pattern command, and a symbol (main symbol) to be displayed in the first display area Dm based on the received display effect state command. is selected from each pattern (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, normal pattern), and the selected pattern is displayed as the main pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 a display synchronized with the variation pattern of each symbol set by the main control device 110, and to notify the player in the current effect state. It is possible to inform the player of the change of the pattern in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display control device 114 displays all of the variable display (symbol row) of each pattern (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, normal pattern) in a predetermined area (secondary pattern display in the second display area Dn). Areas Dn1 to Dn3 (see FIG. 9(a))), and some of them can be displayed in the first display area as the main pattern. Figure) is not limited to this, for example, when receiving a display variation pattern command corresponding to each pattern (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure), the received display A pattern (main pattern) to be displayed in the first display area Dm and a pattern (secondary pattern) to be displayed in the sub-symbol display area are discriminated based on the performance state command, and the third pattern is displayed based on the discrimination result. The device 81 may display a variable display (symbol row) corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure).

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 61), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S3708 in FIG. 66). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command (see S3710 in FIG. 66).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223f is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by adding 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 60) is executed. . The production counter 223f has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when a pattern of production is determined by referring to a plurality of counter values in one loop process, different counter values are used. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used in a plurality of places, so that bias in the set effect pattern can be suppressed. It should be noted that the effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing different processing on the value obtained from the same counter. Specifically, among the production patterns, one selection refers to the ones digit of the acquired value, another selection refers to the tens digit of the acquired value, and another selection refers to the one digit of the acquired value. It is also possible to multiply the value obtained by multiplying the digits by 3 by the value obtained by multiplying the tens digits by 5, and refer to the ones digit of the obtained value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress bias in the set effect patterns while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect patterns.

During time saving flag 223g is a flag for showing that the present is during time saving. If the time saving flag 223g is ON, it indicates that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is not the time saving state. This time saving medium flag 223g is set to ON when it is determined in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that the state shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot ends (3906 in FIG. 68), and the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66 In S3113 reference), it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S3701 of FIG. 66: Yes), and when it is determined that the time saving flag 223g is on (S3704 of FIG. 66: Yes ), and is set to OFF (S3705 in FIG. 66).

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the special symbol variation (lottery) is executed once (that is, the time saving number of times) is set, so the time saving medium flag 223g is turned on as described above. When the variation of the special symbol is started in the state set to , the time saving medium flag 223g is set to OFF, but the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the game state is the time saving state For example, if the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times, a time saving number counter that can determine the number of times of the remaining period is provided, and the special pattern is changed (lottery). The value of the counter may be updated immediately, and when the value of the counter is updated to a value indicating that the time saving state is terminated, the time saving flag 223g may be set to OFF. Thus, even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of times of time saving is set to a plurality of times (two times or more), the sound lamp control device 113 side can surely discriminate whether or not the current game state is the time saving state. can be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (once), the end condition of the time saving state is established. , Other configurations may be used, for example, the number of times of variation of the first special symbol and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol are configured to be separately measurable, and the condition for ending the time saving state is the first special symbol. is changed (lottery) 10 times, or until the second special symbol is changed (lottery) once, and the time saving state ends when either one of the end conditions is satisfied. Alternatively, the time saving state may be terminated under conditions other than the number of fluctuations of the special symbols. In this case, for example, when the lottery result of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) or normal symbols becomes a predetermined lottery result, an end condition for terminating the time saving state is established, or the pachinko machine 10 Various driving members provided (electric accessory 640a, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650) may use a configuration in which an end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied when driven, The number of driving times of the various driving members described above may be configured to be measurable, and when the number of driving times reaches a predetermined number (for example, two times), the end condition for ending the time saving state may be established. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to diversify the timing at which the time saving state ends, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The time saving remaining period storage area 223h is an area for storing the variation time of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured so that the time saving state ends when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) fluctuate once during the time saving state. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol set during the time saving state becomes the remaining period during the time saving state as it is.

The continuous game flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a right-handed game state (continuous game state). It indicates that the game state is the right-handed game state, and if it is set to OFF, it indicates that the current game state is the normal state. This flag 223i during consecutive games is set to ON (see S3903 in FIG. 68) when it is determined that the jackpot has started in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), and the effect is performed based on the effect state selection table 222b. Referred to when selecting the state (see S3918 in FIG. 68), if it is determined that it does not enter the time saving state after the end of the jackpot, or if the end condition of the time saving state is established in a state where there is no pending memory of special figure 2 is set to OFF (see S3907 and S3912 in FIG. 68).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a game state (right-handed game state) that is advantageous to the player, in addition to the jackpot state and the time saving state, and has shifted from the time saving state in the state of having the reserved memory of the special figure 2. It is a game property that includes a normal state (see FIG. 12), and whether or not the current game state (right-handed game state) is advantageous to the player The sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to make a determination based on commands, various state commands, and the like. As a result, there is no need for the main controller 110 side to execute processing for determining whether the current gaming state is an advantageous state, and the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Note that the main controller 110 side may perform the process of determining whether or not the current game state is advantageous to the player. In this case, a command indicating that a game state (right-handed game state) advantageous to the player is set is output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the fact that the right-handed game state is in progress is notified to the outside. It is preferable to configure so as to output a signal for notification (right-handed signal). In this case, in addition to the period in which the game state itself, such as the jackpot state or the time saving state, is advantageous to the player, the game state is not an advantageous game state (although it is a normal state), but the predetermined condition is satisfied. When it is determined to shift to a jackpot state, the player is made to continuously execute the right-handed game by notifying the outside that the right-handed game state is in progress. It is possible to suppress the troublesome game.

The variable time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the special figure 1 variable time during the time saving state, and the remaining period of the time saving state is calculated based on the measured value of the counter. This variation time counter 223j, in the counter update process (see S3311 in FIG. 70), during the time saving (during the time saving state), when it is determined that the variation of the special figure 1 has started (S4103 in FIG. 70: Yes), The value of the counter is set to "1", and thereafter every time the counter update process (see S3311 in FIG. 70) is executed, the value of the counter is incremented by "1" until it reaches "150000" (S4108 in FIG. 70). See), when the counter value becomes "150000" (S4107 in FIG. 70: Yes), the counter value is set to "0" (S4109). Then, based on the value of the variable time counter 223j, the remaining working hours period (remaining working hours state) is calculated (S4105 in FIG. 70).

The state storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the state when various state commands output from the main controller 110 are received. If a status command has been received (S3215 in FIG. 61: Yes), status information based on the received status command is stored (S3216 in FIG. 61). A display state command is set based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k, and various images (background image and demonstration image) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are set by the main controller 110. Images corresponding to various states are displayed.

In the display control device 114, the effect state storage area 223m stores the display mode of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and each reserved symbol (special figure 1 reserved). It is an area that stores the effect state used for setting the display effect state command referred to when determining the display mode of the pattern, the special figure 2 reserved pattern, the general pattern reserved pattern). This effect state is the setting status of various flags set in various processes of the audio lamp control device 113 (continuous flag 223i, normal figure effective flag 223q, pseudo effect flag 223r, special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s), and each It is selected in the effect state setting process (S3114 in FIG. 68) based on the pattern fluctuation stop timing (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and the selected effect state is stored in the effect state storage area 223m. It should be noted that the effect state storage area 223m is configured to store (memorize) the selected effect state for the past several times. As a result, it is possible to compare and discriminate between the effect state before the transition and the effect state after the transition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the transition pattern that cannot be shifted when a normal game is played, and to determine the presence or absence of a fraudulent game.

Also, when the production state transitions in a predetermined transition pattern over multiple times (for example, when the transition from the production state 4 to the production state 5 is repeated five times or more without going through the production states 1 and 2) A production state (for example, Dalian Zhuang production state) that is selected only for the game can be provided, and the production effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that when the Dalian-so production state is set, it is preferable to display a bonus image that the player cannot normally see in the first display area Dm without displaying the main pattern on the third pattern display device 81. .

Special 2 pending flag 223n is a flag for indicating that there is a pending memory of Special Figure 2 (Special 2) in the time saving state, and by setting this Special 2 pending flag 223n to ON, It shows that there is a pending memory (reserved design) of FIG. This special 2 reservation flag 223n is set to ON when the number of special 2 reserved balls is updated to 1 in the number of reserved balls related processing (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3403 in FIG. 63). This special 2 reservation flag 223n is referred to when it is determined that the time saving state is terminated in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), and the number of special 2 reservation balls becomes 0. is set to off.

Special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the reservation storage of special figure 2 (special 2) has reached the upper limit (4 pieces) in the time saving state, and this special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p By being set to on, it indicates that the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 (special 2) reaches the upper limit (4 pieces) in the time saving state, and the special 2 reserved upper limit flag 223p is set to off, Indicates that the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 (special 2) is not the upper limit (4 pieces).

This Special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON ( Refer to S3407 in FIG. 63), specific effect setting processing (refer to S3315 in FIG. 69), and is set to OFF when the number of special 2 reserved balls is no longer the upper limit.

The normal pattern effective flag 223q is a flag for indicating a normal pattern fluctuation (normal pattern fluctuation) in which the operation of the electric accessory 640a executed at the time of winning can be an operation pattern (long open) advantageous to the player, By setting this normal pattern valid flag 223q to ON, it indicates that the electric accessory 640a is a normal pattern fluctuation at a timing that can be opened for a long time, and by setting it to OFF, the electric accessory 640a is short Indicates that it is a normal figure fluctuation at the timing of opening.

This general pattern valid flag 223q is set to ON when it is determined that the fluctuation start and fluctuation end timings are both in the time saving state in the normal pattern fluctuation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) (FIG. 67 S3806 reference), if it is determined that the timing of the fluctuation start is not in the time saving state, or if it is determined that the timing of the fluctuation end is not in the time saving state, it is set to OFF (S3809 in FIG. 67 reference). The setting status of the normal pattern effective flag 223q is referred to when selecting the effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

The pseudo effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 small hit is executed when the game state is the normal state, and by being set to on, the special figure 1 small hit is normally performed. is executed. By setting the pseudo effect flag 223r to ON, the effect display with the pseudo symbol as the main symbol (pseudo main symbol) is executed during the small winning game (see FIG. 22). This pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON by the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) when the small hit winning of special figure 1 occurs in the normal state (see S3915 in FIG. 68), and the small win is set to OFF (S3917 in FIG. 68). Then, the setting state of the pseudo effect flag 223r is referred to when selecting the effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

Special 2 variation flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) has started, and by being set to ON, the second special symbol (special figure 2) It indicates that the fluctuation has started. This special 2 variation flag 223s is set to ON in the variation pattern related process (see S3202 in FIG. 62), when the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302 in FIG. 62). And, when the variation pattern command for special figure 1 is received, it is set to OFF. The setting status of the special 2 variation flag 223s is referred to when selecting the effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the special 2 variation flag 223s is set to ON, that is, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the variation result (lottery result ), and furthermore, the small winning game executed based on the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is that the ball is in the specific area (V It is configured to be a small winning game that easily passes the winning switch 650e3). That is, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is configured to be advantageous to the player just by being executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment configured in this way, while the special 2 variation flag 223s is set to ON (that is, while the second special symbol is varying), the second special symbol It is variably displayed as a main design (special figure 2 main design). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variable display of the second special symbol that gives an advantageous state to the player.

The general pattern winning information storage area 223t is an area in which, when a normal symbol winning information command is received, the winning information included in the winning information command is stored. Since the detailed configuration is the same as that of the special figure winning information storage area 223a described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223u is a flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, and by being set to ON, it indicates that the normal pattern is fluctuating. This normal figure fluctuation start flag 223u determines that the received fluctuation pattern command is not a special figure fluctuation pattern command (normal figure fluctuation pattern command) in the fluctuation pattern related processing (see S3202 in FIG. 62) When it is set to ON (see S3306 in FIG. 62), and in the normal figure fluctuation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S3801 in FIG. 67: Yes), It is set to off (see S3802 in FIG. 67).

The replacement flag 223v is a flag indicating that the end timing of the time saving state (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation in which the fluctuation is started in the time saving state) and the end timing of the normal figure fluctuation satisfy a predetermined condition. By being set to ON, the end timing of the normal figure fluctuation indicates that it is within 2 seconds of the end timing of the time saving state. By setting the replacement flag 223v to ON, the effect state "6" is selected as the effect state.

The privilege effect execution flag 223w is a flag for indicating that the privilege effect is being executed, and when set to ON, it indicates that the privilege effect is being executed. While the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON, a privilege effect (see FIG. 21) that cannot be seen normally is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加This privilege effect execution flag 223w determines that the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (see S4002 in FIG. 69) in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69), and the privilege effect command for display is set (see S4004 in FIG. 69), is set to ON (S4005 in FIG. 69), and in the rendering state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), after the flag 223i is set to OFF (FIG. 68), and is set to OFF (see S3908 in FIG. 68). In other words, if the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON even once while the flag 223i is set to ON (during the continuous mode) (the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 reaches the upper limit) reach), the privilege effect is continuously executed until the continuous villa mode ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the privilege presentation ends immediately even when the privilege presentation is executed. That is, after the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, at least, the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is all digested, and after that, until the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time saving state ends, the privilege production is executed, the privilege effect can be continuously displayed.

In addition, by configuring in this way, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 over a long period of time that the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit, so that the surrounding players can You can appeal and get satisfaction. Furthermore, in order to obtain the satisfaction, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to execute a specific privilege effect on the condition that the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit even once, but not limited to this, for example, the continuous villa mode A means for measuring the number of times the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit may be provided inside, and different privilege effects may be executed based on the measurement result by the means. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON, the privilege effect is set to be executed until the continuous villa mode ends. A period until all the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 is consumed may be set as a period during which the privilege effect is executed. As a result, during the consecutive villa mode, the performance can be switched every time the special figure 1 variation is executed during the time saving state, and the game is motivated to continue the consecutive villa mode with a new feeling. can be done.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the conditions for executing the privilege presentation are satisfied, the privilege presentation is automatically performed. However, other configurations may be used. By operating the operating means (frame button 22) provided in the machine 10, the normal effect and the privilege effect may be switched and executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a desired effect to the player.

In this embodiment, the case where the number of pending balls of the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit is set as the condition for executing the privilege production, but even if other conditions are set as the conditions for executing the privilege production Well, for example, in addition to the case where the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, it may be set as a condition that special figure 1 during fluctuation is elected per (jackpot, small per). In this way, when the number of pending balls of special figure 2 has reached the upper limit, if the lottery result of special figure 1 during fluctuation is a big hit, it is actually 5 times (1 big hit based on special figure 1, special Since a jackpot game (4 jackpots based on FIG. 2) is provided, the game state becomes more advantageous to the player. By executing the privilege presentation only when such a condition is established, the sense of value of the privilege presentation can be enhanced, and the game can be motivated to watch the privilege presentation.

In this case, if the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is 3 (the semi-upper limit number less than the upper limit number), based on the lottery result of special figure 1, whether or not the privilege effect is executed to the player (suggestion display of privilege effect execution). As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the provision of the privilege presentation. In addition, when the number of special 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit (4), the privilege effect is configured to be executed, and the content of the privilege effect is the lottery result of the changing special 1, At the time when the number of pending balls of special figure 2 reaches the upper limit (when the execution condition of privilege production is satisfied), change based on the remaining period of time saving state (remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 during fluctuation) may Even when configured in this manner, the player can be motivated to play the game.

The end effect execution flag 223x is a flag for indicating that the end effect (see FIGS. 19(b) to 20(b)) for suggesting that the continuous villa mode will end, and is turned on. By being set to , it indicates that the end effect is being executed. This end effect execution flag 223x, in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69), in a state in which the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to off, when the time saving remaining period is 10 seconds, it is turned on. It is set (see S4010 in FIG. 69), and is referenced when the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to ON in the number of pending balls related processing (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3404 in FIG. 63). Here, in a state in which the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON, when the second suspension flag 223n is set to ON, the time saving state of this time is ended (variation of special figure 1 is ended) Also, the variation of special figure 2 (lottery) is started, and the continuous mode will continue. Therefore, a win command for display is set for the end effect being executed, and an effect suggesting a revival from the end effect is executed. As a result, the player can expect the continuation of the consecutive villa mode even after the execution of the ending presentation, and can motivate the player to play the game until the end.

Then, in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), the continuous shooting flag 223i is set to OFF after it is set to OFF (see S3909 in FIG. 68). In addition, the end effect executed in the present embodiment may be configured to be executed even in a state where the special figure 2 pending flag 223n is set to ON. In this case, the continuous villa mode is always continued. Therefore, it is possible to increase the appearance probability of continuous villa mode continuation in the ending effect. Further, when a plurality of special figure 2 reservations are acquired during the period during which the end effect is being executed, the corresponding effect may be executed.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. For example, , a command storage area is provided.

This command storage area is an area where various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written according to a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and the processing according to the command is performed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed after the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 71) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the command pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 36) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time with the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 71).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a ``special pattern jackpot'', display a ``○'' pattern for a certain period after stopping the fluctuation production, and if it is a ``off of the special pattern'', display an ``x'' pattern after the fluctuation production is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 (left first ball entrance 64a, right first ball entrance 64a, 64b), or when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected, the power-on variation image is generated using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. is drawn, and the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to alternately display the power-on variation images on the third pattern display device 81 . As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main pattern (third pattern), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. Also, a right-hand navigation image (see FIG. 15(a)) and the like are stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third symbol display device 81 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern which imitates is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and has at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, and an effect state storage area 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state and that the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a that are normally closed will be opened. The round effect is a effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is a effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state (big win state).

As described above, the demonstration effect is the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. , the third pattern consisting of the main patterns with no numerals "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also describes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 35). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 35).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the case of the display data table. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image). This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 (see S5005 in FIG. 71). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S6605 in FIG. 82(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 73(b)). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73B) and the simple display setting process (see S5308 in FIG. 73(b) S5309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 82(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 82(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 36) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 73(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S6205 in FIG. 81) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 36), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 73(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S6207 in FIG. 79). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6717 in FIG. 83). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S6718 in FIG. 83). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 84).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 73B) is executed (see S6802 in FIG. 84).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The effect state storage area 233 k is an area for storing effect state information included in the display effect state command output from the sound lamp control device 113 . The effect state information stored in the effect state storage area 233k is referred to when determining display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. In addition, this embodiment has variation pattern data corresponding to each piece of effect state information, and is configured so that a different variation pattern is determined even when the same display variation pattern command is received. .

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 58. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the update of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 is executed (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum When the values (299, 99, 99, 239 and 99 respectively in this embodiment) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the first left entrance 64a and the first right entrance 64b (hereinafter referred to as the first entrance 64 when referring to both the first left entrance 64a and the first right entrance 64b) ) or a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the second ball entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is followed by the passage of the ball. A gate passage process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48. FIG.

After executing the through gate passing process, the V entrance passing process accompanying the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S108). After that, the V passing process accompanying the winning to the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S109). Details of the V entrance passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 59. FIG.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S110), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the display device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined. If the mode is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol is reserved) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the processing of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). . The stop symbols are set in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, it is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 whether the special symbol is a big win, a small win, or a loss, and the special symbol is a big win or a small win. In this case, one of the big hits A to G or one of the small hits A to E is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 or the small hit type counter C5.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the blue LEDs are turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, when it is a small hit, the red LED is lit, and when it is a loss, the red LED and the green LED are lit. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process. is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), an opening scenario for a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). Next, the jackpot start flag 203h and the jackpot middle flag 203i are set to ON (S219), the time saving counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S222).

In the process of S222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S222: Yes), a small win start setting process is executed (S223). Next, the process of S221 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S222: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 1 or more (S224). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S224: No), the process of S221 is executed and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter 203g is 1 or more during time saving (S224: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203g during time saving (S224), and the process of S221 is executed. After that, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery of "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small win" or "special symbol omission" (whether or not Judgment) is performed, and the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81 is determined.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, it is determined whether or not it is during time saving (S301). When it is not during time saving (S301:No), normal fluctuation start processing (S302) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is during working hours (S301: Yes), working hours fluctuation start processing (S303) is performed, and this processing is ended.

Next, normal variation start processing (S302) and time reduction variation start processing (S303) executed in the special symbol variation start processing (S213) described above will be described.

First, the normal fluctuation start process (S302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing normal variation start processing (S302) executed in the special symbol variation start processing (see S213 in FIG. 39).

In the normal fluctuation start process, first, the data of the execution area in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) is acquired (S401). After that, based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result is acquired (S402). Specifically, in the case of lottery for the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 26(b)) is referred to for a big hit or a small hit. If it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 26(c)) is referred to determine the big win or the small win. I do.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S403). If the lottery result is a big win (S403: Yes), based on the value of the first win type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the display mode at the time of the normal big win corresponding to the special symbol and the big win type is set ( S404). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 big winning selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 big winning selection table 202b2. It is determined what the jackpot type is among jackpots (jackpots A to G) of various special patterns (see FIG. 27(b) or (c)).

In the process of S404, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpots A to G). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpots A to G) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Thereafter, a normal jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S405, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the variation pattern table 202d1 for the special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for the special figure 2 (common to normal and short time) to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation (FIG. 29(a) or FIG. 30(b)).

In the processing of S406, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S405 is set (S406). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S404 is set (S407). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (see FIG. 53). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S407 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big win (S403: No), it is further determined whether or not the lottery result is a small win (S408). When the lottery result is a small hit (S408: Yes), the display mode at the time of the normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S409). Thereafter, a normal small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S410). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at a small winning symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S405, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the small per variation pattern table 202d3 for special figure 1 or the variation pattern table for special figure 2 big per variation pattern table 202d5 (Common to normal/time saving) is compared to determine the variation time of the symbol variation (FIG. 29(d) or FIG. 30(b)). Next, the processes of S406 and S407 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

If the result of the lottery is not a small hit (S408: No), the display mode for the normal off corresponding to the special symbol is set (S411). After that, based on the number of held balls, the variation pattern when the game is out of normal is determined (S412). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S405, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the variation pattern table 202d2 for special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for big hit for special figure 2 ( Normal/time saving common) is compared to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation (FIG. 29(c) or FIG. 30(b)). Next, the processes of S406 and S407 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the time reduction variation start process (S303) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the time saving variation start process (S303) executed in the special symbol variation start process (S213, see FIG. 39). This time-saving change start process (S303) differs from the above-described normal change start process (S302) in that the display mode and change pattern for time-saving are set (determined), and the other points are the same. , the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the processing of S505, S510, and S512, when determining the variation pattern for time saving of the first special symbol, as described above, it is determined based on the time saving variation pattern table 202d4 for special figure 1 (Fig. 30 (a )reference). On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern for time saving of the second special symbol, it is determined based on the special figure 2 variation pattern table 202d5 (common to normal and time saving) as in the normal variation start process (S302) (Figure 30(b)).

Next, the small winning start setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the small winning start setting process (S222). This small hit start setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), small hit type (small hit A to E) Based on, it is a process for setting the operation of the V entrance solenoid 209a, the retention solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209c in the small winning game.

In the small hit start setting process (S222), first, read out the small hit type selected in the process of S409 of the normal fluctuation start process or the process of S509 of the time reduction start process (S601), then the small hit type A or B (S602). If it is a small hit type A or B (S602: Yes), an open scenario for special figure 1 is set (S603). It should be noted that the opening scenario for special figure 1 specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 and the staying member 650n. That is, during the small winning game production, it indicates that the operation of the V entrance solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b is set so that the opening/closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n are opened for a predetermined period (see FIG. 10).

When the processing of S603 ends, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is B (S604). When the small hit type is B (S604: Yes), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that the V winning is disabled (S605). That is, the operation of the channel solenoid 209c is set so that the ball cannot flow down to the channel 650h3 (see FIG. 10(a)). After that, the process proceeds to S608. In the process of S604, if the small winning type is not B (that is, the small winning type is A) (S604: No), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that V winning is possible (S606). That is, the operation of the channel solenoid 209c is set so that the ball can flow down to the channel 650h3 (see FIG. 10(b)).

On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the small per type is not A and B (that is, the small per type is C, D or E) (S602: No), the open scenario for special figure 2 is set (S606 ). In addition, the opening scenario for the special figure 2 specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 and the staying member 650n. That is, during the small winning game production, it indicates that the operation of the V entrance solenoid 209a and the retention solenoid 209b is set so that the opening/closing door 650f1 and the retention member 650n are opened for a predetermined period (see FIG. 11(a)). When the process of S607 is completed, the flow path solenoid operation is set so that V winning is possible (S606). That is, the operation of the channel solenoid 209c is set so that the ball can flow down to the channel 650h3 (see FIG. 11(a)).

When the processing of S605 and S607 is completed, the V passage time jackpot type corresponding to each small hit type is set in the V passage time jackpot type storage area 203m (S608). More specifically, based on the small winning type acquired in the process of S601 and the special symbol 1 big winning selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 big winning selection table 202b2, the V passing time big winning type (jackpot C to G) is determined. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined to be a big hit C (7 rounds with short time), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit D (2 rounds with no short time). If the small hit type is C, it is judged to be a big hit F (5 rounds with short time), and if the small hit type is D, it is judged to be a big hit G (10 rounds with short time). , If the small hit type is E, it is determined to be a big hit E (15 rounds with short working hours) (see FIG. 27(b) or (c)).

Next, based on the small hit type, the start of the small hit is set (S609), and the small hit start flag 203j and the small hit middle flag 203k are set to ON (S610). After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the starting winning prize information processing (S105) will be described. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a process of holding the values when there is a starting prize.

When the starting winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S701). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S702). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If not less than (S703: No), the process proceeds to S707. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), special symbol 1 reserved 1 is added to the value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d (S704). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S705).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S705, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above Each value of the counter C5 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S707 to S712, the same processing as in the processing from S701 to S706 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640 as well. The only difference is that the process of holding the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, if it is determined in the process of S707 that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance 640 (S707: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S712 (S713). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the look-ahead process (S713), which is one process in the starting winning process (see S105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S713).

In this look-ahead processing (FIG. 44, S713), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S801). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S801: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the new winning is the first special symbol winning (S802). ).

In the process of S802, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S802: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 and the special symbol 1 small winning selection table 202e1 Based on, the lottery result, the jackpot type and the small hit type are acquired (S803), and the process proceeds to S804. In the process of S804, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, the small hit determination result, and the small hit type acquired in S803 (or S805) is set (S804), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S802: No), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2, and the special symbol 2 small winning selection Based on the table 202e2, the lottery result, the big hit type, and the small hit type are acquired (S805), the process of S804 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the electric This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

In the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S901). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device displays the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S901: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S901: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is fluctuating (S902), and the second symbol display device is displayed. If the display mode is not fluctuating (S902: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S904), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S905).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S906). In the process of S906, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S907).

Next, a lottery result is obtained based on the second winning random number table 202c (S908). In this control example, there is no distinction between a high-probability state and a low-probability state in the lottery of normal symbols, and the probability of winning a normal symbol is always constant. Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S907 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design, and if it is in the range of "12 to 239", the normal design is off. (see FIG. 26(d)).

After that, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S908 is the normal symbol hit (S909), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S909: Yes), the time of the hit is set (S910), and the process proceeds to S912. In the process of S910, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S909, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S909: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S911). In the process of S911, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S912.

When the processing of S910 or S911 ends, in the processing of S912, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S912). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S912: Yes), the time-saving hit flag 203q is set to ON (S913). Next, the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S914), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S912: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 4 seconds (S915), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, compared to the normal state of the normal symbols, the variable display time is very short from "4 seconds to 3 seconds", so the second A state is created in which the ball can easily enter the ball entrance 640 .

On the other hand, in the process of S902, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S916). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S914 or the process of S915 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S916, if the variable time has not elapsed (S916: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S916, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S916: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S917). In the process of S917, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S910, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S911, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S917, when the second symbol display update process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S910 or the process of S911.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 45, S106) is the normal symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S918). If the lottery result of this time is a normal symbol hit (S918: Yes), the electric accessory control process is set (S919), and this process is terminated.

Next, the electric accessary product control process (S919) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. This electric role product control process (S919) is a process executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and FIG. S919) is a flow chart.

In the electric accessary product control process, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203q is ON (S1001). When the time saving flag 203q is ON (S1001: Yes), the time saving flag 203q is set to OFF (S1002), and then it is determined whether or not the time saving is in progress (S1003). If it is during time saving (S1003: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened (3 seconds) and closed. (5 seconds) and open (3 seconds) (S1004), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in S1001, if the flag 203q during the time saving is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1001: Yes), or in S1003, if it is not during the time saving (S1003: No), the pachinko machine 10 is a normal symbol. , the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to open (0.1 seconds), close (0.1 seconds), and open (0.1 seconds). (S1005, this process ends.

Thus, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, compared to the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening operation of the second entrance 640 is "open (0.1 seconds), closed (0.1 seconds), open ( 0.1 second) → open (3 seconds), close (5 seconds), and open (3 seconds)”.

Also, when the opening operation of the electric role product 640a is set by the electric role product control process (S919), when the electric role product opening/closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next , the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is started.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through-gate passing process (FIG. 47, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1101). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S1102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1103).

If the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball. 1 is added to the value (M) of the number counter 203f (S1104). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S1105). In addition, in the process of S1105, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. When the process of S1105 is completed, the normal map prefetching process is executed (S1106).

Here, with reference to FIG. 48, normal map prefetching processing is demonstrated (S1106). FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the contents of this normal map prefetching process (S1106). In normal figure look-ahead processing (FIG. 48, S1106), first, a preliminary determination based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is executed (S1201). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S1105 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c.

Next, based on the result of the preliminary determination, the prior determination result of winning and the result of variation time determination are acquired (S1202). After that, set the normal figure winning information command (S1203), terminate this process, and return to the through gate passing process.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description continues. When the general pattern look-ahead process (S1106) is completed, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S1107). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1107: Yes), this processing is finished as it is. If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1107: No), it is determined whether or not the current time is during the small hit (S1108). As a result of the determination, if it is during a small hit (S1108: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a small hit (S1108: No), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is fluctuating (S1109). As a result of the determination, if the second special symbol is fluctuating (S1109: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If the second special symbol is not fluctuating (S1109: No), it is determined whether or not it is during time saving (S1109). As a result of the determination, if it is during time saving (S1110: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If it is not during working hours (S1110: No), an error command is set (S1111), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S1103: No), the normal map prefetching process (S1106) is skipped, the processes of S1107 to S1111 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, the V entrance passage process (S108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V entrance passing process (S108), first, it is determined whether or not a small win is in progress (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the small winning is in progress (S1301: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S1302), and this process is terminated. If it is not during the small winning (S1302: No), it means that the ball enters the second variable winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set (S1303) and this processing is performed. exit.

The V entrance passage command set in the process of S1302 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53). , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the passage of the V entrance. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect during a small winning game based on the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 12).

Next, the V passing process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the V passage processing (S109). This V passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V passage processing, first, the V passage time jackpot type value stored in the V passage time jackpot type storage area 203m is acquired (S1401), and the V flag 203n indicating the acquired V passage time jackpot type is set to ON ( S1402). Then, a V passing command is set (S1403).

Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type corresponds to the small hit B (S1404). In the process of S1404, when it is determined that it corresponds to the small hit B (S1404: Yes), an error command is set (S1405), and this process is terminated. In this embodiment, the ball can pass through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 when it is a small hit A, C, D or E (that is, other than the small hit B), and the small hit type value It is only when the small hits A, C, D or E (that is, other than the small hit B) are set. Therefore, when the small hit type value is a small hit B, when the V passing process (S1401) executed based on the ball passing through the V winning switch 650e3 is executed, illegally V winning switch 650e3 It is considered that this is the case when the ball is won. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1405, an error is output and fraud can be discovered.

FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 52, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S1612.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1716 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1612). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1613, S1614).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1613, S1614) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1608). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes possible to start the ball payout control while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S1610, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1611), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1701 to S1709 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1712 and S1713 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 53), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing for transmission to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1701). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 43). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the jackpot start command, round number command, and jackpot end command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production, 1 A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704). In the jackpot control processing, the first specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the first specific prize winning port 65a has passed, or a specified number of balls have won in the first specific prize winning port 65a. determine whether Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, in the case of the small winning state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the small winning, and small winning control processing for opening or closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 ( S1705). In the small win control process, the opening/closing door 650f1 is opened based on the opening scenario, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the opening/closing door 650f1 has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the opening/closing door 650f1. Then, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the small winning control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

When the processing of S1705 ends, the electric accessary product opening/closing processing for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1706). In the electric role product opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric role product is set by the electric role product control process (FIG. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the electric role product is opened and closed. Start opening and closing control of objects. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening operation set in the processing of S1004 or S1005 in the electric accessory control process (FIG. 46, S1005) is completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, S405, S410, S412 of the normal variation start process (FIG. 40, S302) or the short time variation start process (FIG. 41, S303) executed during the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) or the processing of S505, S510, S512, the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the normal fluctuation start process (see FIG. 40) or the time-saving fluctuation start process (see FIG. 41) S405, S410, S412 or S505, S510, S512 set by the process When the fluctuation time corresponding to the pattern ends, the fluctuation display being executed in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the normal fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40) or the time reduction fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 41) The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set by the processing of S404, S409 and S411 or the processing of S504, S509 and S511.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S914 or the process of S915 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S917 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device The display is terminated, and the stop design (second design) is displayed (lighted up) on the second design display device in the display mode set by the processing of S910 or S911 of the normal design variation processing (see FIG. 45). do.

Next, a storage device control process for opening and closing the storage valve 750a associated with the storage device 750 is executed (S1709).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1711). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1711: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described processes after S1701 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1711: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1712, S1713).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1712). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1713).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1709 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1710, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 51 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1714 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1714), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). and transmit (S1715). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1716), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1717), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1710 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1709, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1712 and S1713 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization process (S1601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S1701. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1801). Specifically, if the big hit start flag 203h is set to ON by the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), it is determined that the special symbol big win is started. In the process of S1801, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1801: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF (S1802), and the opening command is set (S1803).

The jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53). It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When receiving the jackpot start command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114 . When the display controller 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect for starting the jackpot. When the processing of S1803 ends, the storage cancellation flag 203p is set to ON (S1804), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1801, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1801: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1805). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, it is determined by whether or not the big hit flag 203i is ON. In the process of S1805, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S1805: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1805: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1806). If it is time to start a new round (S1806: Yes), the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1807), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set ( S1808). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 continuously executes a big win, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the big win has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S1806, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1806: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is met (S1809). Specifically, when a predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds) elapses after the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, or when the first variable winning device 65 has a predetermined number of balls (eg, , 10 in total).

In the process of S1809, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. , the process ends. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S1809: No), it is determined whether or not it is time to end the big win (S1811). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot.

In the process of S1811, when it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1811: Yes), the jackpot end command is set (S1812), and the flag 203i during the jackpot is set to OFF (S1813).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was a jackpot B (S1814). In the process of S1814, when it is determined that it is not a jackpot B (7R time saving no jackpot) (S1814: No), the time saving medium counter 203g is set to 1 (S1815), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1814, when it is determined that the jackpot B (7R time-saving no jackpot) is determined (S1814: Yes), the process of S1815 is skipped and the process ends.

The jackpot end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139). It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When receiving the jackpot end command, the audio lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the prize information stored in the special figure prize winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 . Then, it transmits to the display control device 114 a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected display mode of the jackpot end. When the display controller 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the jackpot end effect.

Then, with reference to FIG. 55, small hit control processing (S1705) is demonstrated. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing a small winning control process (S1705) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This small winning control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol small winning state, execution of various effects according to the small winning, 2 This is a process for opening or closing the opening/closing door 650f1 of the variable winning device 650. FIG.

In the small winning control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol small winning is started (S1901). Specifically, if the small winning start flag 203j is set to ON by the processing of S610 of the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 42), it is determined that the small winning of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1901, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901: Yes), the small hit start flag 203j is set to OFF (S1902), and the small hit start command is set (S1903).

The small hit start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53). It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the small winning start command, it transmits a display small winning start command to the display control device 114 . When the small winning start command for display is received by the display control device 114, an effect for starting a small winning is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

After completing the processing of S1903, the V inlet solenoid 209a and the channel solenoid 209c are set to ON based on the opening scenario (S1904), the operation of the retention member 650n is started (S1905), and this processing ends.

The open scenario referred to in the process of S1904 is set in the above-described small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42), and the open scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a is set regardless of the small hit type, and the flow path The opening scenario of the solenoid 209c is set only when the small hit type is A, C, D or E. Therefore, the open/close door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened in all the small winning games, and the ball can enter the second variable winning device 650. On the other hand, only in the small hits A, C, D or E when the channel solenoid 209c is turned on, the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 can flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2. That is, the small hits A, C, D or E are the small hit types in which the big hit is given, and the small hit B is the small hit type in which the big hit is not given.

In addition, by starting the operation of the retention member 650n (the retention solenoid 209b is turned on) in the process of S1905, one ball can be retained in the distribution destination area 650h3.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901, when it is not the timing to start the small winning of special symbols (S1901: No), it is determined whether or not the small winning of special symbols is in progress (S1906). During the special symbol small winning, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small winning (including during the special symbol small winning game). During the predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol is included. Specifically, it is determined by whether or not the small hit middle flag 203k is ON. In the process of S1906, if it is not during the small hit of the special symbol (S1906: No), this process is finished as it is.

In the process of S1906, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the process of winning (S1906: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the V entrance is satisfied (S1907). Specifically, when a predetermined time (eg, 6.5 seconds) elapses after the open/close door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, or when a predetermined number of balls (eg, 10 in total), it is determined that the closing condition is met.

The closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls enter the second specific winning hole 650a.

In the process of S1907, when the closing condition of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is satisfied (S1907: Yes), the V entrance solenoid 209a is turned on to close the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650. It is set to OFF (S1908), and the retention solenoid 209b is set to OFF in order to end the operation of the retention member 650n (S1909), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable prize winning device 650 is not established (S1907: No), it is determined whether or not it is time to end the small winning (S1910). Specifically, after the passage of a predetermined time (three seconds in this control example) from the establishment of the closing condition of the V entrance described above, it is determined that it is time to end the small win. As a result, after the operation of the retention member 650n is completed, the small winning end processing (turning off the flow path solenoid 209c) can be executed, so that the ball retained in the distribution destination area 650h3 is moved to the V winning switch 650e3. You can definitely hit the ball.

In the process of S1910, when it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910: Yes), the flag 203k during the small hit is set to OFF (S1911), the small hit end process is executed (S1912), and each solenoid is opened. The scenario is cleared (S1913), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, when it is not the timing of the end of the small winning (S1910: No), this process is ended as it is.

Here, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the small winning ending process (S1912) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the small winning ending process (S1912). This small hit end process (S1912) is a process that is executed when it is determined that it is the timing of the small hit end in the small hit control process.

In the small hit end process (S1912), first, the flow path solenoid 209c is turned off (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203n is on (S2002). In the process of S2002, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is ON (S2002: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game. A process for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passage of the V prize switch 650e3 is performed.

Specifically, based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n, the opening scenario of the first specific winning opening 65a is set (S2003), and the start of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n ( S2004). Next, the big-hit start flag 203h and the mid-big-hit flag 203i are set to ON (S2005), and the V flag 203n is set to OFF (S2006). Then, the time saving medium counter 230g is set to 0 (S2007), the value of the V passing jackpot type value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203m is cleared (S2008), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2002, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is not ON (S2002: No), it means that the ball did not pass through the V prize switch 650e3 as a small winning ball, so no big win is awarded. In order to end, a small hit end command is set (S2009). After that, the process of S2008 is executed, and this process ends.

The small hit end command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201. In the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53), voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the jackpot end command, the audio lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the prize information stored in the special figure prize winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 . Then, it transmits to the display control device 114 a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected display mode of the jackpot end. When the display controller 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the jackpot end effect.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process (S1706) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening/closing process (S1706) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This electric accessory opening/closing process (S1706) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and is a process for performing opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640.

In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the opening operation of the electric accessary product 640a is set (S2101). The opening operation of the electric role product 640a is set by the electric role product control process (FIG. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). In the processing of S2101, if the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is not set (S2101: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to open the electric accessory 640a for the first time (S2102). When it is determined in the process of S2102 that it is time to open the electric accessory 640a for the first time (S2102: Yes), the electric accessory 640a is set to be opened (S2103), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that it is not the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: No), then it is determined whether it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2104). When it is determined that it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: Yes), the closing of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2105), and then it is determined whether the time saving operation is in progress (S2106 ). If it is determined in the process of S2106 that the time saving operation is not in progress (S2106: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S2106 that the time saving operation is in progress (S2106: Yes), a closing command is set (S2107), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2104 that it is not the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: No), then it is determined whether it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2108). When it is determined that it is time to open the electric accessory 640a for the second time (S2108: Yes), the electric accessory 640a is set to be opened (S2109), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2108 that it is not the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: No), then it is determined whether it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2110). If it is determined that it is not the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2110: No), then it is determined whether the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S2111). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance 640 (S2111: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2110 that it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), and if it is determined in S2111 that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S2111: Yes), the closing of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2112). Then, the setting of the electric accessary product 640a opening operation is cleared (S2113), and this process is terminated.

Next, the storage device control process (S1709) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing storage device control processing (S1709) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 53). This storage device control process (S1709) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a associated with the storage device 750. FIG.

In the storage device control process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the release counter 203pa is greater than 1 (S2201). If it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not greater than 1 (that is, 0 or 1) (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not the retention release flag 203p is ON (S2202). If it is determined to be ON (S2202: Yes), release of retention (that is, release of retention valve 750a) is set (S2203). Then, the value of the cancellation counter 203pa is set to 1, and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the value of the cancel counter 203pa is greater than 1 (S2201: Yes), the processes of S2201 to S2204 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2205.

In the process of S2205, it is determined whether or not the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205). If it is determined that the value of the cancellation counter 203pa is not 25000 (S2205: No), the value of the cancellation counter 203pa is incremented by 1 (S2206), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205: Yes), the storage closed (that is, the storage valve 750a is closed) is set (S2207), and the storage release flag 203p is set. It is set to off (S2208). Next, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 0, and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 70. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 59, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S3119 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 60), it executes power-off processing in S3119. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S3119 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S3002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S3119. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), it will transfer to S3004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S3119 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S3002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure has occurred, and during execution of the power-off process in S3119. It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3119 is executed (see S3118 in FIG. 60). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S3119 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010), an interrupt Permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to main processing.

The reason why the clearing process of S3009 is skipped is that when the process of S3008 is reached from S3004 through the process of S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 60, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S3101 was executed (S3101). If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3112 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3111. In the process of S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S3102 to S3111 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S3112 command determination processing, S3113 variable display setting processing, S3114 effect state setting processing, and S3115 specific effect setting processing are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the processing of S3112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S3113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to the variable performance without delay. Further, by executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are changed without delay to the display contents corresponding to the current game state based on the command received by the command determination process. can be made

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3111 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring/performance processing monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the performance effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S3109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the counter update process (S3111), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S3112). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, the process proceeds to S3113. In the processing of S3113, variable display setting processing is executed (S3113). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, the process proceeds to S3114. In the process of S3114, effect state setting process is executed (S3114). In this effect state setting process, each effect mode (display mode of the third symbol, display mode of the reserved symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to correspond to the game state. Processing is executed, and a display effect state command is generated and set based on the set effect state. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this rendering state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the process of S3114, the process proceeds to S3115. In the process of S3115, a specific effect setting process is executed (S3115). In this specific effect setting process, a process for setting an effect different from the variable effect for showing the lottery result of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) is executed. Details of the specific effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the specific effect setting process is finished, it is determined whether or not information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3118), and the power-off processing is executed (S3119). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S3120), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S3112). This command determination process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. This process is for

In the command determination process (FIG. 61, S3112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern related command has been received (S3201). In addition, the variation pattern related command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol or a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, from the main controller 110, The selected variation pattern (variation time) is output corresponding to each of the first special design and the second special design, or the normal design.

In the process of S3201, when it is determined that the variation pattern related command is received (S3201: Yes), the variation pattern related process (S3202) is executed. This variation pattern related process is used to extract a variation pattern based on a variation pattern related command output (received) from the main controller 110 and cause the display control device 114 to perform an effect display. Here, the variation pattern related processing (S3202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variation pattern related process (S3202). In this variation pattern related processing (S3202), it is determined which symbol the variation pattern command received this time corresponds to the variation pattern, and based on the determination result, the processing corresponding to the received symbol is executed. . In this variation pattern related process (S3202), it is determined whether the variation pattern related command received this time is a variation pattern command for a special symbol (special figure) (S3301). In the processing of S3301, if it is determined that it is a special figure variation pattern command (S3301: Yes), then the process proceeds to S3302.

In the process of S3302, if it is determined that it is a special figure 2 variation pattern command (S3302: Yes), as shown in FIG. (S3301). Here, it is determined whether the variation pattern received this time is a variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302), and if it is determined that it is a variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302: Yes), then , Set the special 2 fluctuation flag 223s on (S3303), set the special figure fluctuation start flag on, and extract the fluctuation pattern from the received command (S3305), while the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set be done.

The variation start flag 223d (special figure variation start flag) provided in the variation display of the special symbol is set to ON, the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S3305), and this processing is terminated. . On the other hand, in the process of S3301, when it is determined that the variation pattern related command received this time is not a special figure variation pattern command, the normal figure variation start flag 223u is set to ON (S3306), and the received variation pattern The variation pattern type is extracted from the command (S3307), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 for each type of special symbol (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol). It is stored in an identifiable format, and in the later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 66), the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol are sent to the display control device 114. Used when notifying (when setting a variation pattern command for displaying special symbols).

Returning to FIG. 61, the description is continued. In the processing of S3201, if it is determined that the variation pattern related command has not been received (S3201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3203). If it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command, the special figure 2 stop type command, or the normal figure stop type command) is received (S3203: Yes), it corresponds to the type of the received command The stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S3204). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the design is set to ON, and when the normal pattern stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the normal design is set to ON.

When the processing of S3204 is finished, next, the stop type (completely out (out), reach out, small hit, jackpot (hit)) is extracted from the received stop type command (S3205), and this processing is performed. finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S3205 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. Then, it is referred to when the later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) is executed, and is used to set a stop type command for display that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

In the process of S3203, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3203: No), it is determined whether the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3206). If it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S3206: Yes), the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command (that is, the number of holding balls of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is extracted The counter value is updated (S3207). More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c.

In addition, in the process of S3207. When a normal symbol reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is received, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter (not shown) (that is, the number of reserved balls of variable display of normal symbols) is extracted. The corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is also updated according to the counter value obtained.

After finishing the process of S3207, the process related to the number of pending balls is executed (S3208). In this pending ball number related process (S3208), a process for setting various flags and display commands based on the pending ball number of special figure 2 is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 63, the processing related to the number of pending balls (S3208) will be described in detail. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the content of the pending ball count related process (S3208).

When the pending ball number related process (S3208) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is an update of the special 2 (special figure 2) pending ball number (S3401). Here, if it is determined that there is no update of the special 2 reserved ball number (S3401: No), that is, if the reserved ball number command received this time is not the reserved ball number of special figure 2, this process is terminated as it is . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3401 that the number of reserved balls has been updated (S3401: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls has been updated to 1 (S3402). Here, it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1, that is, the number of special 2 reserved balls has changed from "0" to "1", that is, from the state of no special 2 reserved balls to the state of having them. do.

In the processing of S3402, when it is determined that the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1 (S3402: Yes), the special 2 reserved flag 223n is set to ON, and then the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON. It is determined whether or not it is set (S3404). When it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the end effect (see FIG. 19(b)) is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 (S3404: Yes), a display victory command is set (S3405), and this process ends.

When the win command for display is set, the character "win" is displayed as the effect result of the end effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 20(a)), which is advantageous to the player. It is notified that the state will continue. In addition, if the ball wins the special figure 2 during the period in which this end effect is being executed, the effect may be switched even during the end effect. It may be notified that the ball has won the special figure 2 at the end of the end performance executed during the period set.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, it is notified that the ball has won the special figure 2 (second ball entrance 640) at the timing when the ball has won the special figure 2 (second ball entrance 640) and as an effect. If there is a possibility that a time lag may occur with the timing to perform, for example, during the execution period of the end effect, the reserved design that displays the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 may be deleted. Thereby, it is possible to suppress notifying the player of the effect result of the end effect due to the increase in the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 although the end effect continues.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description continues. In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the number of special 2 reserved balls has not been updated to 1 (S3402: No), then it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to the upper limit (4) (S3406 ), if it is determined that it has been updated (S3406: Yes), the Special 2 hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S3407: Yes), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3406 that the number of special 2 reserved balls has not been updated to the upper limit, the process of S3407 is skipped and this process ends.

Here, the pending ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) or when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Therefore, every time there is a start winning, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed by the processing of S2210 to the main controller. It is possible to match the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of 110, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d Even if the value of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e deviates, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 or the special symbol The value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

Also, in the process of S3206, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S3206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3209). In the process of S3209, if it is determined that the winning information related command has been received (S3209: Yes), the winning information related process is executed (S3210). In this winning information related process (S3210), setting of various flags and setting of various counters referred to for setting various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 are performed. As a result, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, before the variation of the pending special symbol is started (that is, the special symbol executed before the target special symbol variation) During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect showing the lottery result of the special symbol for which the winning information command is transmitted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. Suggestion notification can be performed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Here, the winning information related processing (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information related process (S3210). When this winning information related process (S3210) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the winning information related command received this time is a winning information command related to a special figure (special symbol) (S3501). When it is determined that the command is a winning information command related to a special figure (S3501: Yes), the received winning information command is stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a (S3502), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3501, if it is determined that the winning information related command received this time is not a winning information command related to a special figure (special symbol) (a winning information command related to a normal figure) (S3501: No), winning a prize The information is stored in the general-purpose winning prize information storage area 223t (S3503), and this process is terminated.

It should be noted that, in a gaming machine in which special symbol winning information (prefetching of special symbols) and normal symbol winning information (prefetching of normal symbols) are executed, output from main control device 110 to sound lamp control device 113 The output timing of each winning information command is the same, and when determining by winning information related processing (S3210), priority is set for each winning information command, and only winning information commands with high priority are determined. It may be configured as As a result, there is no need to execute different determination processing for each winning information command, and the processing load can be reduced. , it is possible to easily execute an effect not intended by the player.

In other words, the winning information included in the winning information command is obtained when the ball enters each ball entrance (first ball entrance 64 or second ball entrance 640) or through gate 67 by main controller 110. Since each counter value obtained is information indicating the result of performing discrimination in advance before the lottery based on the entering ball is executed, or the value based on the counter value, the sound lamp control device 113 Even if the winning information command is not reliably acquired on the side, the game will not be hindered, so if the predetermined condition is met (the winning information command for the special figure and the winning information command for the general figure are received at the same In some cases, by intentionally not acquiring one of the winning information commands, the above effects are achieved. Furthermore, like the left first ball entrance 64a and the right first ball entrance 64b of the present embodiment, in a configuration in which there are multiple acquisition conditions (entrance) for one symbol (first special symbol), winning The information command contains information that enables the audio lamp control device 113 to identify which acquisition condition the winning information command is based on, and the processing based on the winning information command is performed according to the identification result. may be varied. Specifically, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a prize winning information command based on the ball entering the first left ball entrance 64a, an effect based on the received prize winning information command (so-called look-ahead effect) is generated. may be performed more frequently than when a winning information command based on a ball entering the right first ball entrance 64b is received. As a result, even if the first special symbol is the same, the frequency at which the look-ahead effect is executed can be easily varied. According to the configuration shown in the above example, during the game (left-handed game) aiming at the left first ball entrance 64a, the look-ahead effect based on the first special symbol can be executed (frequently executed), and the right first During the game aiming at the ball entrance 64b (right-handed game), it may be difficult to execute the look-ahead effect based on the first special symbol (executable with a low probability). As a result, it is possible to set an effect mode according to the game state.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description is continued. In the process of S3209, if it is determined that the command related to winning information has not been received (S3209: No), then it is determined whether a command related to winning has been received (S3211). When a hit-related command is received (S3211: Yes), a hit-related process (S3212) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the winning-related processing (S3212) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the win-related processing (S3212). This hit-related process (S3212) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a hit-related command has been received in the command determination process (see FIG. 61).

In the hit related process, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command is received (S3601). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S3601: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S3602), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 60). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting (notifying) the start of the jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S3601: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3603). In the process of S3603, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S3603: Yes), 1 is added to the round number cumulative counter (S3604). After that, a round number command for display is set based on the round number cumulative counter (S3605), and this processing ends.

In the process of S3603, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3603: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S3606). In the process of S3606, when it is determined that the jackpot end command is received (S3606: Yes), the jackpot end command for display is set (S3607), and this process is ended.

In the process of S3606, when it is determined that the big hit end command is not received (S3606: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command is received (S3608).

In the processing of S3608, when it is determined that the small winning start command is received (S3608: Yes), the small winning start command for display is set based on the small winning type (S3609), and this processing ends. In the process of S3608, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S3608: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S3610).

In the process of S3610, when it is determined that the small winning end command is received (S3610: Yes), in order to execute the effect suggesting the end of the small winning game, the small winning end command for display is set (S3611). , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3610, when it is determined that the small winning end command has not been received (S3610: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received (S3612).

In the processing of S3612, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S3612: Yes), the process based on the ball entering the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed, and the V passing command for display is executed. is set (S3613), and the process ends. In this embodiment, there is provided a measuring means for measuring the number of times the V passing command is received during the period in which the continuous flag 223i is set to ON. It is configured so that the V pass command can be set. Specifically, the display V passing command is set so that the privilege effect is executed only when the number of times of measurement by the measuring means exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). As a result, the player can aim for more V passes, and can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, as a condition for setting the contents of the display V passing command, other conditions may be set, for example, the number of small hitting games that did not pass V and the number of small hitting games that passed V, respectively Means for measuring and calculating the ratio may be provided, and the content of the V-pass command for display may be set based on the ratio calculated by the means. As a result, a player who has executed a large number of small winning games that do not pass the V executes a performance to congratulate them when the player has passed the V, or a player who executes the small winning games that have passed the V at a high rate. , it is possible to execute a production that congratulates that effect.

In the processing of S3612, if it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S3612: No), this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description is continued. In the process of S3211, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S3211: No), then it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received (S3213). If it is determined in the process of S3213 that the notification command has been received (S3213: Yes), the notification sound is set, the display command for notification is set (S3214), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3213 that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S3215). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S3215: Yes), the status information based on the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223k (S3216), and this process ends. The state commands received here include a normal state command for indicating that the game state is the normal state, a big win state command for indicating that the game state is the big win state, and a small win state command for the game state. A small winning state command for indicating that the game state is a time saving state command for indicating that the game state is a time saving state, that the electric accessory 640a is operating, and how many times it is operating It is a state command related to the game state that can be grasped on the main control device 110 side, such as an operation state command for indicating .

The state command described above is configured to be received from the main controller 110 when the game state is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the process of determining the content of the received status command from becoming complicated, and reduce the processing load. Further, when a power failure or the like occurs and the data in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is erased, the currently set status command is output in the power failure recovery process. In addition, the output timing of the state command is not limited to this, and the currently set game state may be output periodically, or the game state may be in a state in which a specific output condition is satisfied without transition. (For example, during a jackpot game, the timing when a predetermined round is reached, or in the normal state, the state command may be output when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times). As a result, the current game state can be grasped more reliably on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3215 that the status command has not been received (S3215: No), then processing according to other commands is executed (S3217). In the process of S3217, for example, it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main controller 110, and if it is determined that a stop command has been received, a display stop command is set based on the received command, or a game is played. When receiving a ball entry command set based on the entry of a ball into each entry hole provided on the board 13, the number of entries is accumulated for each type of entry hole into which the ball entered. , to set the number of balls entered for display and other processing.

Next, the variable display setting process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S3113). This variable display setting process (S3113) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) is a process executed in order to display the variable display effects on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

Here, in the present embodiment, each pattern (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) corresponding to the main pattern mainly displayed in the third pattern display device 81 is displayed according to the set production state. Designed to be variable. In the variable display setting process, a variable display pattern command is set for each of the symbols described above, and the display control device 114 is notified of it. Then, by the display control device 114, based on the received display variation pattern command and the contents of the received display effect state command, the main pattern (symbol to be displayed in the first display area Dm) and the secondary pattern (second (symbols to be displayed in the display area Dn) are displayed. As a result, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced in a gaming machine in which different presentation displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of presentation states.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S3113), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3701). And when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S3701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S3707. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S3701: Yes), based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the detailed aspect of the fluctuation display of this special symbol Each process of S3702 to S3706 for determining is executed.

More specifically, first, the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S3702), then the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S3703), and it is determined whether the time saving flag 223g is ON ( S3704). In the process of S3704, if it is determined that the time saving flag 223g is ON (S3704: Yes), then the time saving flag is set to OFF (S3705), and the variation pattern command for special figure display is set ( S3706), the process proceeds to S3707. On the other hand, in the processing of S3704, when it is determined that the flag 223g is not ON (is OFF) (S3704: No), the processing of S3705 is skipped and the processing of S3706 is executed.

In addition, when executing the processing of S3706, subtract 1 from the value of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) Based on this, the data in the special figure winning information storage area 223a included in the command storage area is shifted.

In the processing of S3707, it is determined whether the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure is set to ON among the stop type selection flags 223e of the RAM 223 (S3707). Then, when it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure among the stop type selection flags 223e is off (S3707: No), the process proceeds to S3712. On the other hand, in the processing of S3707, when it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure among the stop type selection flags 223e is ON (S3707: Yes), the (for special figure) stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3708), then the stop type extracted in the process of S3205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 61) is acquired (S3709), and the acquired stop type is set as it is (S3710). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S3711). After that, normal figure fluctuation display setting processing (S3712) is executed, and this processing ends.

This general pattern fluctuation display setting process (S3712) is a process executed in order to display a fluctuation display effect in the third symbol display device 81 when a fluctuation pattern command relating to general pattern fluctuation is received from the main control device 110. Here, normal figure fluctuation display setting processing (S3712) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation display setting process (S3712). When the normal pattern fluctuation display setting process (S3712) is executed, first, it is determined whether the normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223u is set to ON. Then, when it is determined that the normal map fluctuation start flag 223u is off (S3801: No), since it is in a state where the fluctuation pattern command related to the normal map is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S3810 Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal figure fluctuation start flag 223u is on (S3801: Yes), based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the detailed aspect of the fluctuation display of this special symbol Each process of S3802 to S3810 for determining is executed.

In addition, among the various processes executed in the normal figure fluctuation display setting process (S3712) of FIG. 67, the same process as the fluctuation display setting process (S3113) described with reference to FIG. A detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the process of S3801, if it is determined that the normal figure fluctuation start flag 223u is on (S3801: Yes), S3702 and S3703 for special figures executed in the above-described fluctuation display setting process (S3113) For the processing, the processing of S3802 and S3803 with the target changed to the normal figure is executed, and then it is determined whether the timing at which the variation based on the received variation pattern command is performed is the time saving state (S3804). Here, determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k and the remaining time saving period information stored in the remaining time saving period storage area 223h.

In the process of S3804, if it is determined that the variation start timing is in the time saving state (S3804: Yes), then the timing at which the variation based on the received variation pattern command ends (in the case of winning, the electric accessory 640a (S3805). Here, by calculating the difference between the remaining time saving period information stored in the remaining time saving period storage area 223h and the variation time included in the acquired variation pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a time saving state at the timing when the variation ends. do.

In the process of S3805, if it is determined that the fluctuation end timing (electric accessory 640a operation start timing) is in the time saving (S3805: Yes), the normal figure effective flag 223q is set to ON (S3806), then fluctuation It is determined whether the end timing is within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807). In the process of S3807, if it is determined that the fluctuation end timing is within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807: Yes), the replacement flag 223v is set to ON (S3808), and the display fluctuation pattern command (for normal drawing ) is set (S3810), and the process proceeds to S3811.

On the other hand, in the process of S3804 or S3805, when it is determined No, the normal pattern valid flag 223q is set to OFF (S3809), and the process proceeds to the process of S3810 described above. Also, in the process of S3807, if it is determined that the fluctuation end timing is not within 2 seconds of the end of the time saving (S3807: No), the process of S3808 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3810.

Next, the processing of S3811 to S3815 similar to S3707 to S3711 described above with reference to FIG. 66 is executed, and this processing ends. In S3811 to S3815, the processing to be executed is the target of the stop type command, in S3707 to S3711, the stop type command for the special map, and in S3811 to S3815, the stop type command for the general map. Since the contents are the same except that they are different, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect state setting process (S3114) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the contents of the rendering state setting process (S3114). This effect state setting process (S3114) is a process for setting the effect state according to the state command output from the main control device 110 and the current game situation. By outputting the information based on (display production state command) to the display control device 114, the display mode of each pattern (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display mode of the reserved memory number (the number of reserved patterns) of each pattern is configured to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the effect state.

When the effect state setting process (S3114) is executed, first, the state information (game state) stored in the state storage area 223k is read (S3901). This state information is stored in the state storage area 223k based on the state command received from the main controller 110 in the above-described command determination process (see S3112 in FIG. 61). Therefore, it is used to determine the current gaming state on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

Next, referring to the state information stored in the state storage area 223k, it is determined whether or not the current state (state information stored in the state storage area 223k) indicates the start of the jackpot (S3902). Here, when it is determined that it indicates the start of a big hit (S3902: Yes), the consecutive game flag 223i is set to ON (S3903), and the process proceeds to S3918. On the other hand, in the process of S3902, if it is determined that it does not indicate the start of the jackpot (S3902: No), then it is determined whether it indicates the end of the jackpot (S3904).

In the processing of S3904, if it is determined that the end of the jackpot is indicated (S3904: Yes), then it is determined whether to shift to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot (S3905). The determination of S3905 is determined based on the jackpot type information stored in the state storage area 223k. In the process of S3905, when it is determined to shift to the time saving state (S3905: Yes), the time saving flag 223g is set to ON (S3906), and then the process proceeds to S3918.

On the other hand, if it is determined not to shift to the time saving state in the processing of S3905 (S3905: No), set the flag 223i during continuous residence to OFF (S3907), set the privilege effect execution flag 223w to OFF (S3908), The end effect execution flag 223x is set to OFF (S3909), and the process proceeds to S3918.

If it is determined in the process of S3904 that it does not indicate the end of the jackpot (S3904: No), then it is determined whether it is time to end the time saving state (S3910). If it is determined that it is time to end the time saving state (S3910: Yes), then the special 2 pending flag 223n for determining the presence or absence of pending storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set to ON. It is determined whether or not it is set (S3911). Here, when it is determined that the special 2 suspension flag 223n is not ON (is OFF) (S3911: No), the continuous residence flag 223i is set to OFF (S3912), and the process proceeds to S3918. Similarly, when it is determined that the special 2 pending flag 223n is set to ON (S3911: Yes), the process proceeds to S3918.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, the continuous flag 223i is set to ON, and if the time saving state is not given after the jackpot ends, or when the time saving state ends, the special figure 2 When the pending memory is "0", the continuous running flag 223i is set to OFF. As a result, during the jackpot game, the time saving state, and the state in which the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is performed when the time saving state shifts to the normal state, While the state is repeatedly performed (during a specific period that is advantageous to the player), it is possible to continue to set the continuous running flag 223i to ON. Therefore, by measuring various values (for example, the number of times the jackpot was executed, the number of winning balls, etc.) during the period when the consecutive game flag 223i is turned on, various values during the consecutive game mode can be easily calculated. can be tallied, and processing can be simplified in the pachinko machine 10 having a continuous game mode in which a plurality of different game states are entered.

Returning to FIG. 68, the description continues. In the process of S3910, if it is determined that it is not the time when the time saving state ends (not the time saving end timing) (S3910: No), it is determined whether it is the small hit start timing (S3913), and at the small hit start timing If it is determined that there is (S3913: Yes), it is determined whether the current state is normal (S3914). In the process of S3914, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state (S3914: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON (S3915), and the process proceeds to S3918. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current state is not the normal state in the process of S3914 (S3914: No), the process of S3915 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3918.

In the process of S3913, if it is determined that the present is not the small hit start timing (S3913: No), then it is determined whether the present is the small hit end timing (S3916), and if it is the small hit end timing (S3916: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to OFF (S3917), and the process proceeds to S3918. Here, in the case of the small hit end timing, when it is determined that the pseudo effect flag 223r is not set to ON (that is, the end timing of the small hit executed during the time saving state), S3917 The process proceeds to S3918 without executing the process.

In the process of S3916, when it is determined that the current time is not the small winning end timing (S3916: No), the process proceeds to S3918. In the processing of S3918, the current rendering state is selected based on the rendering state selection table 222b (S3918). Then, a display effect state command indicating the selected effect state is set (S3919), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the specific effect setting process (S3115) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the contents of the specific effect setting process (S3115). This specific effect setting process (S3115) is a process for setting a display command for displaying a specific effect on the third symbol display device 81 when a specific condition is satisfied.

In the first embodiment, the privilege effect executed when the number of reserved memories (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches the upper limit (4 pieces) during the time saving state (see FIG. 21) And, in the time saving state, when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not reserved and stored, the remaining period of the time saving state (variation remaining period of special figure 1) becomes a predetermined period (10 seconds) The ending effect (see FIG. 19(b)) which is executed at the end of the game is configured to be executed as a specific effect.

In addition, when the display control device 114 receives a display command indicating the content of the specific effect, the display mode corresponding to the received specific effect content is displayed regardless of the variable display state of each pattern (whether or not it is fluctuating). is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

When the specific effect setting process (S3115) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the flag 223i is set to ON (S4001). (S4001: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the flag 223i is set to ON (S4001: Yes), then it is determined whether the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON (S4002). If it is determined that there is no (S4002: No), it is determined whether the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003).

In the process of S4003, when the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003: Yes), the privilege effect command for display is set (S4004), and the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON (S4005 ), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4003: No), or in the process of S4002, the privilege effect execution flag 223w is already set to ON If it is determined that it is (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4006.

In the processing of S4006, it is determined whether or not the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006). Here, if it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4006: No), then it is determined whether the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to ON. Then (S4007), if it is determined that the special 2 suspension flag 223n is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4007; No), it is determined whether the remaining time is 10 seconds (S4008 ).

In the process of S4008, determination is performed by reading information indicating the remaining time saving period stored in the remaining time saving period storage area 223h. In the process of S4008, if it is determined that the remaining time saving period is 10 seconds (S4008: Yes), the command for displaying the continuous villa end effect is set (S4009), and the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4010). ), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4006, if it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006: Yes), or if the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to ON in the process of S4007 (S4007 : Yes) skips the processing of S4008 to S4010 and terminates this processing.

As described above, in the specific effect setting process (S3315) of this embodiment described with reference to FIG. When the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is set to ON during (time saving state) (when the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 reaches the upper limit), the privilege production (see FIG. 22) is configured to be executed there is By executing this privilege performance, it is possible to provide the player with a high value-added performance, so that the player can be motivated to play the game during the time saving state. Also, when the privilege effect is executed, the general pattern main pattern Dmc will not be displayed, so the state where the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 cannot be increased (the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 has already reached the upper limit) state), it is possible to suppress the effect of agitating the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, thereby suppressing the player from feeling a great sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, since the above-described privilege effect is configured to be continuously executed until the consecutive game flag 223i is set to OFF (until the consecutive game mode ends), it adds value to the player. Since it is possible to provide a high performance for a long period of time (at least, the period until all the reserved memories of special figure 2 are consumed), the high value-added performance ends in a short period of time, and the player's motivation to play. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem such as a decrease in

In addition, as the second specific effect, without acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 while the flag 223i is set to on (time saving state) (the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 is " 0” state), and when the remaining period of the time-saving state reaches a predetermined period (remaining 10 seconds), an end effect (see FIG. 19(b)) that suggests that the continuous villa mode will end. configured to run. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp the possibility that the consecutive villa mode will end, and the period that is advantageous to the player (the consecutive villa mode) will end before the player notices it. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

Next, the counter updating process (S3111) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the contents of the counter update process (S3111). This counter update process (S3111) is a process for updating the value of the variable time counter 223j and calculating the elapsed time (remaining time) of the executed variable display. The information (remaining time saving period command for display) regarding the remaining time (remaining time saving period) of the variable time referred to here is output to the display control device 114 and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. , is referred to when setting the effect content in the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the counter update process (S3111) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current value of the variable time counter 223j is "0" (S4101). If it is determined to be "0" (S4101: Yes), that is, the state where the value of the variable time counter 223j is not updated (the special figure 1 variation in the time saving state is not executed) is, It is determined whether the current time is during the time saving (during the time saving state) (S4102). Here, determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k.

In the process of S4102, if it is determined that the current is in the time saving (S4102: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the timing when the variation of the special figure 1 is started (S4103), the special figure 1 If it is determined that it is time to start the variation (S4103: Yes), the value of the variation time counter 223j is set to "1" (S4104), and the remaining variation time is calculated based on the value of the variation time counter 223j. A period (remaining time saving period) is calculated, and information indicating the calculated remaining time saving period is stored in the remaining time saving period storage area 223h (S4105).

After that, a short time remaining period command for display is set (S4106), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4102, if it is determined that the current is not in the time saving (in the time saving state) (S4102: No), or in the process of S4103, if it is determined that the current is not the start timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation If (S4103: No), the processing of S4104 to S4106 is skipped and this processing ends.

In the process of S4101, if it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223j is not "0" (S4101: No), that is, the state in which the value of the variable time counter 223j has already been updated (special figure 1 in the time saving state In the state where variation is being executed), it is determined whether the value of the variation time counter 223j is "150000" (whether 150 seconds have elapsed) (S4107). Here, if it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223j is not "150000" ("less than 150000") (S4107: Yes), the value of the variable time counter 223j is incremented by "1" (S4108). , the process proceeds to the above-described S4105. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4107 that the value of the variable time counter 223j is "150000" (S4107: Yes), the value of the variable time counter 223j is set to "0" (S4109), and Go to processing.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 that is executed during the time saving state is specified as all "150 seconds" regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, so in FIG. As shown, the upper limit of the value of the variable time counter 223j is set to "150000" corresponding to "150 seconds", but the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is changed to a plurality of variation patterns ( If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be selected from the variation time), the upper limit value of the variation time counter 223j can be reset based on the contents of the variation pattern to be executed (set variation time). and determines whether the value of the variable time counter 223j being updated has reached the set upper limit value.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 84. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S5001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S5001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S5102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored therein are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S5103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S5104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 71) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) (S5105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S5001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 72, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S5101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S5101. and the processing of S5102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S5103 to S5105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S5103 to S5105 without performing the processes of S5101 and S5102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S5003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S5005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 82(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S6502 in FIG. 82A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73(b)) during that time, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (not shown), which are the images when the power is turned on, are drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S5308 in FIG. 73B) and simple display setting processing (see S5309 in FIG. 73B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is given by the main controller 110 under voice lamp control. When received via the device 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance is performed. be able to. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third pattern display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S5005, interrupt permission is set (S5006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S5006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 73(a). FIG. 73(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 73(b). FIG. 73(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 36) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 73(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301). If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S5302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S5303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S5302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78. FIG.

In the display setting process (S5303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S5304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S5303) or the simple display setting processing (S5309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S5306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S5304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S5305). 59, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S5307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, front and back reach, front and back reach, complete loss , Chance) are compared with the stop type counter, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S5301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third pattern display device 81, a simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S5309) is executed, and S5304 is executed. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78, details of the command determination process (S5302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 74, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S5303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S5402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S5403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S5404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S5405) and returns to the processing of S5401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S5405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the effect state stored in the effect state storage area 233k is read (S5501). Then, among the variable display data tables corresponding to the variable effect pattern indicated by the display variable pattern command, the variable display data table corresponding to the effect state read out by the processing of S5501 is determined, and the determined variable display data table is used. It reads from the data table storage area 233b and sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S5502).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S5501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5502 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5503). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S5502 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S5504). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S5503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5502, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5505), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5506). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5507), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S5506, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5502 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S5505 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third design display device 81 .

As described above, in the display pattern command process in the present embodiment, the display contents (effect contents ), output (received) from the voice lamp control device 113 so that the display contents corresponding to the display effect state command (the display mode of each pattern, the pending number display mode of each pattern) are determined Configure. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 22, it is possible to execute a display suitable for each rendering state. In addition, since the display control device 114 side distinguishes between the display effect state command and the display variation pattern command and executes processing for determining the display content, the sound lamp control device 113 responds to each effect state. It is no longer necessary to set the display variation pattern command, and the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variation pattern command process, the display content corresponding to the effect state is determined, and the determined display content is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a configuration, based on the display variation pattern command, the above-described display processing is executed for the display content corresponding to all the effect states, and among them, only the display content corresponding to the currently set effect state is displayed to the player. may be configured to be displayed in a visible manner. Specifically, a display layer is provided corresponding to each rendering state, and processing is executed to make layers other than the layer corresponding to the set rendering state transparent, or the set rendering state to bring the corresponding layer to the front. As a result, even if the presentation state is changed while the display based on the variation pattern command is being executed and the display contents are changed, it is possible to respond immediately. In addition, an area (for example, the second display area Dn) in which common display contents are always displayed regardless of the set rendering state is displayed on a separate layer, and the display rendering state command is referred to. The display contents may be determined only by the variation pattern command without the command.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S5404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S5406), If there is a display variation type command (S5406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S5407), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the stop type command process (S5407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 75(b). FIG. 75(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance number) is determined (S5601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S5602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S5603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S5602. In the above-described task processing (S5304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S5602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S5603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed. Image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236 . Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S5601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S5602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S5406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S5406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S5408). If there is an image change command (S5408: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S5409), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the back image change command process (S5409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 76(a). FIG. 76(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S5701). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S5702), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S5701 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S5702. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the rear image of a predetermined range from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set in S5702 is used to determine the back face image discrimination flag. The type of background image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 for normal use or video RAM 236 for normal use) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S5408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S5408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S5410). Otherwise (S5410: Yes), the error command process is executed (S5411), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the error command processing (S5411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 76(b). FIG. 76(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S5801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S5802). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S5801, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S5802, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S5802, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S5410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S5410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect state command in the unprocessed commands (S5412), If there is a state command (S5412: Yes), the effect state information based on the received command is stored in the effect state storage area 233k (S5413), and the process returns to S5401.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S5412, if it is determined that there is no display effect state command (S5412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command (S5440). In the process of S5440, when it is determined that there is a hit-related command (S5440: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S5441), and the process returns to S5401. On the other hand, in the process of S5440, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S5440: No), the other command process is executed (S5414), and the process returns to S5401.

In the process of S5401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes ), the processing of S5402 to S5413 and S5419 is executed again. Then, the processes of S5401 to S5413 and S5419 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the command determination process.

The simple command determination process (S5308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary to display a power-on image (not shown), that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command, are extracted from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only stop type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 75(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 75(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, are executed, and other command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 75(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S5501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the details of the win-related command process (S5441) will be described. This hit-related command process (S5441) is a process executed when it is determined that there is a hit-related command in the command determination process (see FIG. 146).

In the hit-related command process (S5441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S5901). When it is determined that there is a hit start command for display in the process of S5901 (S5901: Yes), the big hit start command process is executed (S5902), and the process proceeds to S5903.

Here, details of the jackpot start command process (S5902) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot start command process (S5902). This jackpot start command process (S5902) is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is a jackpot start command for display in the hit-related command process (FIG. 77), and the effect suggesting the start of the jackpot is executed in the third step. This is processing for displaying on the pattern display device 81 .

In the jackpot start command process (S5902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6002). After that, based on the jackpot start display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set off (S6005), End this process.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description is continued. In the process of S5901, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S5901: No), the process proceeds to S5903. After completing the processing of S5901 or S5902, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5903). If it is determined in the process of S5903 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S5904), and the process proceeds to S5905.

Details of the round number command processing (S5904) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78B is a flow chart showing the round number command processing (S5904). This round number command process (S5904) is a process executed when it is determined that a display round number command has been received in the winning related command process (FIG. 77), and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying the effect when the third symbol display device 81 is pressed.

In the round number command processing (S5904), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S6103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6105), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description is continued. In the process of S5903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S5903: No), the process proceeds to S5905. After completing the processing of S5903 or S5904, it is determined whether or not a display jackpot end command has been received (S5905).

In the process of S5905, if it is determined that there is a display jackpot end command (S5905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5906), and the process proceeds to S5907.

Here, details of the jackpot end command processing will be described. This jackpot end command process (S5906) is a process executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command is received in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 77). This is processing for displaying on the pattern display device 81 .

In the jackpot end command process (S5906), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table. After that, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off, and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description is continued. In the process of S5905, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command, the process of S5906 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5907.

After completing the processing of S5905 or S5906, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S5907). In the process of S5907, when it is determined that there is a small hit start command for display (S5907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S5908), and the process proceeds to S5909.

Here, details of the small hit start command processing (S5908) will be described. This small hit start command process (S5908) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command is received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 77), and suggests the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying an effect on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the small hit start command process (S5908), first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. After that, time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small winning start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set off, and this process is finished.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description is continued. In the process of S5907, when it is determined that there is no small hit start command for display (S5907: No), the process of S5908 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5909.

After completing the processing of S5907 or S5908, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S5909). In the process of S5909, when it is determined that there is a small hit end command (S5909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S5910), and this process ends.

Here, the details of the small hit end command process (S5210) will be described. This small hit end command process (S5210) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit end command is received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 77), suggesting the end of the small hit game This is a process for displaying an effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the small hit end command process (S5210), first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small winning end display data table. After that, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off, and this process is terminated.

Next, details of the display setting process (S5303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 79, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S6202 to S6204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S6205. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S6201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S6202), S6203-S6204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S6203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S6203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S6204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S6301).

Based on this expanded warning image data, task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle necessary for drawing. determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6204), or if it is determined in the process of S6203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S6203: No), then the process proceeds to S6205.

In S6205, pointer update processing is executed (S6205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S6401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S6405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S6403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S6406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S6402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 79, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S6206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S6208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S6209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S6209: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S6210), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6211). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S6214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S5304), from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, from the last time stop design determination flag set by S6215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S6209: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S6216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is changed to the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S6217), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6221), this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set the drawing contents.

In the process of S6216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S6216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the power-on fluctuation image by the power-on fluctuation image is over, for a predetermined time, the power-on fluctuation image (Fig. not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, the details of the transfer setting process (S5305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 82(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S6502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S6501, that is, if it is turned off (S6501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S6502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 82(b). FIG. 82(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S6601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6602). In the process of S6602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S6602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S6602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to S6603. Also, as a result of the process of S6601, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the process proceeds to S6603.

In the process of S6603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S6603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S6603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S5308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) (see S6501: No in FIG. 82(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6205) of the previously executed display setting process (S5303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S6701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6705.

Also, in the processing of S6702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S6702: No), the processing of S6703 and S6704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S6705. In the processing of S6705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6706).

In the process of S6706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S6706 that the transfer process has not ended (S6706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6706: Yes), the process proceeds to S6707. Also, as a result of the process of S6705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S6705: No), the process proceeds to S6707.

In the processing of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707). is turned off (S6708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S6717. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S6707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S6713). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S6713: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6713: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6715). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S6716), and the process proceeds to S6717.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the processing of S6715, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing ends.

In the process of S6717, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717). The determination in the process of S6717 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S6717 (S6717: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S6717 (S6717: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S6718). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S6718, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6719), and this normal transfer setting process ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing the normal image transfer processing, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the rear image is changed. Of the image data used in , image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, details of the drawing process (S5306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S5304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated (S6801). That is, in the processing of S6801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S5304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination top address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S6802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S6803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 73(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine determines whether or not to change the state of a starting port provided on a game board from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls are easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery is executed a predetermined number of times by a game ball entering a starting port in a state that is likely to be changed to the second state, and until the result of the lottery for the predetermined number of times is displayed. In a game machine that is continuously set, the probability that the determination that the lottery is advantageous to the player is executed in a state where the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored early. There was a problem that it would slip.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, during the period when the variation of the special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 that is advantageous to the player is acquired. can be set as a period during which the game can be played, and thus the amusement of the game can be improved.

In some gaming machines in which a lottery for a plurality of symbols is executed, the player is notified of the result of the lottery by displaying the symbol display for indicating the result of the lottery on the display means (third symbol display device 81). There is a problem that a plurality of symbols are variably displayed at appropriate timings, making it difficult for the player to understand the contents of the game.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, among the third symbols corresponding to the plurality of symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the symbol that the player is most interested in in the current game state, that is, Since the symbols that can most affect the game result are displayed in a more emphatic manner than the other symbols, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, depending on the set various game states (normal state, time saving state, jackpot state, etc.), a game that is advantageous to the player (left-handed game or right-handed game) configured differently. This allows the player to change the content of the game while grasping the current game state, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In the first embodiment, it is possible to provide different game characteristics according to the type of special symbol variation executed when shifting to the time saving state, so that the player is prevented from becoming bored with the game early. can be done.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 92. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol fluctuates once during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is terminated, and in the time-saving state in which the first special symbol is fluctuating, the second special symbol It was configured to acquire the reserved memory of

Then, when the change of the first special pattern in the time-saving state is completed, if the reserved memory of the second special pattern is acquired, the change of the second special pattern (lottery) is executed next, and the change is performed. A jackpot game is executed based on (lottery), and after the jackpot game ends, the state is shifted to the time saving state again, and on the other hand, when the fluctuation of the first special pattern in the time saving state ends, the second special pattern is displayed. When the reserved memory could not be acquired, it was configured to shift to the normal state as it is.

In the first embodiment configured in this way, the end timing of the time saving state is the end timing of one variation of the first special symbol, so the player easily predicts the end timing of the time saving state. There is a problem. In addition, in order to make it difficult for the player to predict, it is necessary to be able to set a plurality of different variation times for the variation of the first special symbol, and the memory capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is increased. I had a problem letting it go.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, if the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be acquired at the end of the variation of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, the state advantageous to the player continues and can not be acquired. If not, the game is easy for the player to understand that the state advantageous to the player ends.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state are provided to make it difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the time saving state. Specifically, the condition for ending the time saving state is set when either the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is performed twice or the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol is performed once. .

By configuring in this way, when the variation of the first special symbol of the first rotation (first rotation of time saving) in the time saving state is completed, if the second special symbol is not reserved, the time saving Variation (lottery) of the first special symbol in the second rotation in the state is executed. On the other hand, when the variation of the first special symbol of the first rotation (first rotation of the time saving) during the time saving state is completed, if the second special symbol is reserved and stored, the second special that is reserved and stored Symbol variation (lottery) is executed.

Therefore, in the time saving state, at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed, the case where the game property of acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol is continued, and the reserved memory of the second special symbol It is possible to provide the case where the used variation (lottery) is executed according to the reserved storage status of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state is configured to be selectable from a plurality (two). Therefore, the time saving state period (variation period of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state) can be diversified by a combination of a plurality of change patterns, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the time saving state period is set by a combination of a plurality of variation patterns, in the gaming machine with one time saving time as in the first embodiment described above, when preparing a plurality of variation patterns of the first special symbol In comparison, the memory capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the time saving state is terminated when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed once. As a result, for example, when the second special symbol changes in the first rotation of the time saving, the small hit that is won is not the most advantageous to the player (it is executed when the ball is passed through the specific area. When the number of rounds of the jackpot game is smaller than other small wins), the game is dared to prevent the ball from passing through the specific area, and the second special pattern of the second time-shortening rotation is executed next. It is possible to prevent execution of a special game such as execution of a game aiming at variation of .

In addition, when the variation (lottery) result of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction is winning a small prize, the small winning game is executed after the variation of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction is completed. Since the time-saving state is maintained during the small winning game (because the time-saving end condition is not satisfied), the gaming property of acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the small winning game period and the second variable winning device. A plurality of game features such as a game feature in which a ball is entered into 650 and a ball is passed through a specific area (V prize switch 630) can be simultaneously executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with novel gameplay and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

It should be noted that, as shown in the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol variation that started the variation during the time saving state is completed as the end condition of the time saving state, the special symbol variation of the first rotation of the time saving state Since the small winning game executed after finishing is no longer in the time saving state, it is not possible to provide a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the small winning game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol during the time saving state, the first variation pattern (time saving state A variation pattern longer than the normal pattern variation time in the middle) and a second variation pattern (a variation pattern shorter than the normal pattern variation time in the time saving state) in which it is difficult to execute the game that acquires the reserved memory of the second special symbol. configured to be selectable. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second variation pattern is selected two times in a row, the time saving state is not substantially given (the game to acquire the pending memory of the second special symbol during the time saving state is given), and if the first variation pattern is selected twice in a row, there is a high probability that the second special symbol can be retained during the time saving state. status is given. In addition, when the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern are respectively selected, a time-saving state in which it is possible to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol is given.

That is, based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, the acquisition expectation degree of the second special symbol during the time saving state can be varied, so that the player is provided with a game with unexpectedness. can do. In addition, even if the time-saving state is provided after all the jackpot games are completed without preparing the jackpot type that shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends and the jackpot type that does not shift to the time-saving state, the first Based on the result of selection of the variation pattern of the special symbol, a substantial time-saving state entry ratio can be set, so that an increase in storage capacity due to preparing a plurality of jackpot types can be suppressed.

In addition, by preparing a plurality of variation pattern selection tables for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the time saving state and referring to different variation pattern selection tables based on the game state and game situation, Substantial time-saving state rush ratios can be made more diverse.

The configuration used in the second embodiment (configuration using a plurality of time-saving end conditions) may be used in a gaming machine having game properties other than the second embodiment. When some small hit types are set among a plurality of small hit types set at the time, a small hit game in which the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V prize switch 630e3) (difficult) is executed. It may be used for a game machine that

In addition, in the second embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state based on the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol, the number of times of variation (lottery) is set to 2 times, but the number of times of variation (lottery) may be set more than that. . Furthermore, the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special design and the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the second special design may be set as the end condition of the time saving state, and in addition to the number of fluctuations of the special design , the number of fluctuations of normal symbols, the fluctuation (lottery) result of special symbols, and various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 (electric accessories 640a, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, etc.) You may set end conditions of a time saving state based on the operation|movement condition (presence or absence of operation|movement, number of times of operation|movement).

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is partially configured, the RAM 203 is partially configured, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 , and processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 . Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described. Fig.85 (a) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen in a time saving state. Here, regarding the display screen shown in FIG. 85(a), differences from the above-described first embodiment (differences from the display contents of FIG. 15(a)) will be described. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 85(a) is an example showing a display screen in a state where the reserved memory of the second special symbol is not acquired at the time when the first rotation of time saving is completed. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), when the first rotation of the time saving is completed, the reserved memory of the second special symbol is not acquired (display showing the number of reserved symbols in the special figure 2 main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is not done), next, the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is started as the variation of the second time-saving rotation. Here, a variation pattern of 150 seconds is set as the variation pattern for the second rotation of the time reduction, and the display of "remaining time 0 seconds" displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, "+150 seconds" is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time. This display of "150 seconds" is a display for indicating the variation time of the second time reduction rotation.

Then, in the first main display area Dm, characters "not yet" are displayed as a continuation notification display mode indicating that the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is continued. By displaying such a display screen, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state (the game state in which the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed) continues. This allows the player to play the game with anticipation until the end.

In addition, the "remaining time" displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 is before the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation of the first rotation of the time saving is "0", that is, during the special figure 1 variation of the first rotation of the time saving A value indicating part or all of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation that can be the second rotation may be added and displayed. In this case, the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation of the first rotation of the time saving is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the addition display is performed only when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not acquired. good. As a result, even if the remaining time is running short, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

On the other hand, at the end of the first rotation of the time saving, if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not acquired, the game to acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed as the special figure 1 variation of the second time saving rotation When the difficult second variation pattern (variation pattern shorter than the normal figure variation time in the time saving state) is selected, the display that the remaining time is added as shown in FIG. 85 (a) is not performed, as described above The display screen (time saving state end display) shown in FIG. 20(b) of the first embodiment is displayed. In this case, during the period in which the time saving state end display is being performed, special figure 1 variation of the time saving second rotation is performed.

That is, when the second variation pattern described above is set, since the time saving state is substantially finished, on the third symbol display device 81, despite the time saving state, time saving 2 When the special figure 1 variation of the turning eye is executed, the time saving state end display is displayed. As a result, the player can be notified of the end timing of the game state that can acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 instead of the end timing of the internal game state (time saving state). An easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In addition, during the period when the time saving state end display is displayed, the special figure 1 fluctuation of the second time saving rotation that is executed, and the number of reserved symbols of the special figure 1 that decreases when the second time saving rotation is executed (hold Since the memory number) is displayed in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81, it can be made difficult for the player to notice.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the display timing indicating the end of the time saving state is changed based on the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol selected during the time saving state. Even if the game is internally in the time-saving state, a display indicating the end of the time-saving state is executed if a game state advantageous to the player cannot be imparted. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, in the second embodiment, the case where the second variation pattern (variation pattern shorter than the normal figure variation time in the time saving state) is set, which makes it difficult to execute the game to acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2, is internally Generally, even if it is a time saving state, it is assumed that a game state that is advantageous to the player cannot be given, but in addition, if the normal pattern fluctuation time is longer than the remaining period of the time saving state When the time-saving state ends), it is determined that the game state advantageous to the player cannot be given even if the time-saving state is internally set, and a display indicating the end of the time-saving state is executed. good too.

Next, the display screen in the case where the special figure 1 fluctuation of the time saving first rotation is winning a small hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 85(b) to 86(b). FIG. 85(b) is an example showing a display screen in a state where special figure 1 is won as a small hit and there is one reserved memory of special figure 2 at the time when the first turn of time saving is completed. As shown in FIG. 85(b), in the first display area Dm, the stop display mode "341" indicating that the special figure 1 main symbol Dma has been won as a small hit is stopped and displayed, and the main reserved symbol is displayed. In the area Dm5, a display mode indicating that there is one reserved memory of special figure 2 is displayed.

Then, in the first sub-display area Ds1, "remaining time 0 seconds" indicating that the special figure 1 variation of the first rotation of the time saving has ended is displayed, and furthermore, it is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. "+60 seconds" is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time to the displayed "remaining time 0 seconds". This display of "60 seconds" is a display for showing the playing time of the small winning game executed based on the winning of the small winning of special figure 1.

In other words, although details will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the variation of the special figure 1 (lottery) is performed twice, or when the variation of the special figure 2 (lottery) is performed once, time saving It is set to end the state, and at the time when the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. Therefore, the time saving state is continued during the small hit game executed by the small hit winning of the special figure 1. As a result, even if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be further acquired during the period in which the small winning game is executed.

In this way, the game period in which the player can simultaneously execute the game of entering the ball into the second variable winning device 650 that is opened and the game of acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 by the small winning game. As a special game period notification mode for notification to , "charge combo activation" is displayed in the first display area Dm.

Then, when the small winning game is executed, as shown in FIG. 86(a), the normal figure main symbol Dmc is variably displayed in the first display area Dm, and the game to acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is performed. executed. Furthermore, if the small hit game executed by winning the special figure 1 is a small hit that allows the ball to pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game Then, as shown in FIG. 86(b), "V" is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the jackpot game is started.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 87(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the special figure 1 variation pattern table 202d4 defined in the variation pattern table 202d are partially changed. However, since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Although the details will be described later, conditions for ending the time saving state are also changed.

The special figure 1 time-saving variation pattern table 202d4a (see FIG. 88) of the second embodiment is the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 1 time-saving variation pattern table 202d4 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a different variation pattern (variation time) is set based on.

Specifically, even if the lottery result of special figure 1 is "off", "small hit", or "big hit", if the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99" , a variation pattern with a variation time of 120 seconds is set, and in the case of "100 to 198", a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to greatly vary the game contents during the time saving state depending on the selected variation pattern.

FIG. 87(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment has a special 2 fluctuation flag 203r added to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Special 2 variation flag 203r is a flag for indicating that special figure 2 variation has been performed during the time saving state, and if it is set to on, the variation of special figure 2 is performed during time saving is shown. This special 2 variation flag 203r is determined that the current variation is special figure 2 in the time saving variation start processing 2 (S303 in FIG. 91) executed in the special symbol variation start processing (see S213 in FIG. 39) In the case (S551 of FIG. 91: Yes), is set to ON (see S522 of FIG. 91), is referred to in the time saving end determination process (see S251 of FIG. 90) (see S2301 of FIG. 90), during the time saving of the counter 203g After setting the value to "0", it is set to OFF (see S2303 in FIG. 90).

In this way, at the start of the special figure variation, the result of determining which variation of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 is executed is stored (the corresponding flag is set to on), saving time At the timing when it is determined whether to end the state, by determining whether to end the time saving state based on the stored determination result (whether the time saving state end condition is satisfied), It is possible to appropriately manage the current game state and the type of special figure variation executed during the time saving state.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the type of the special symbol (special symbol) determined at the timing when the variation of the special symbol (lottery) is started is determined, and by storing the determination result, the special symbol Although it is configured to be able to determine whether or not to end the time saving state at the end of the variation timing, other configurations may be used, for example, when the variation of the special figure (lottery) is started, this time By determining whether the time saving state ends at the timing when the variation ends, and storing the determination result, even if control is performed to end the time saving state based on the determination result at the end timing of the special figure variation Well, the type of special figure fluctuation executed this time at the end timing of the special figure fluctuation (type of special figure fluctuation used for fluctuation) is determined, and control to end the time saving state based on the determination result may be executed.

<Regarding control processing in the second embodiment>
The control processing in the second embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment in the contents of the control processing in the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 . Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Now, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation processing is changed to the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 89) in the first embodiment, and the time saving executed in the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 89) End determination processing (see FIG. 90) is added, and further, the time saving fluctuation start processing is changed to the time saving fluctuation start processing 2 (see FIG. 91), and the jackpot control processing is changed to the jackpot control processing 2 (see FIG. 92) is different.

First, with reference to FIG. 89, the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) will be described. In this special symbol variation process 2 (S104 in FIG. 89), the lottery result of the special symbol variation is out of the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment described above, and the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 1 or more. In the case of (S224: Yes), the difference is that the time saving end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 89) is executed, and the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof is omitted.

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 89) described with reference to FIG. 90 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving end determination process (see S251) in the second embodiment. This time saving end determination process (see S251) executes control for determining the end state of the time saving state in the second embodiment having a plurality of end conditions of the time saving state.

When the execution of the time saving end determination process (S251 in FIG. 90) is started, first, it is determined whether the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to ON (S2301 in FIG. 90). In S2301, if the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to ON, that is, if the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed (S2301: Yes), at that point, the time saving end condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Therefore, next, the counter value of the counter 203g during time saving is set to "0" (S2303), the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to off (S2302), and the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to off End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is not set to ON (S2301: No), then 1 is subtracted from the time saving medium counter 203g (see S2304), and this process ends.

FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving variation start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) used in the second embodiment. In this time saving variation start processing 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91), the type of special figure variation executed this time is special figure 1 or special figure 2 for the time saving variation start processing of the first embodiment described above A process for determining is added, and other contents are the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the time saving change start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) is executed, the same S501 and S502 processes as the time saving change start process are executed. When the processing of S502 is finished, next, it is determined whether or not this variation is special figure 2 (S551). If it is determined that the current variation is the special figure 2 (S551: Yes), the special 2 variation flag 203r is set to ON (S552), and the process proceeds to S503. On the other hand, in the process of S551, if it is determined that the current variation is not the special figure 2 (it is the special figure 1) (S551: No), the process of S552 is skipped and the process of S503 is performed. Then, the processing of S503 to S512, which is the same as the time-saving variation start processing, is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203g is subtracted by 1 every time the variation of the special figure other than the special figure 2 (that is, the variation of the special figure 1) is executed, and the time saving When the time saving state is terminated when the value of the medium counter 203g becomes 0, and the variation of the special figure 2 is executed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is forcibly set to 0, and the time saving state It has two conditions for ending the time saving state when ending.

This makes it possible to execute the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 multiple times during the time saving state, and the number of times the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed during the time saving state is single (1 time) can be

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) in the second embodiment will be described. In this jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92), the only difference from the jackpot control process described above is that the number of time reductions given after the jackpot ends is changed from 1 time to 2 times for some jackpots. However, other contents are the same.

Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S704 in FIG. 92). As shown in FIG. 92, when this process is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1814 which are the same as the jackpot control start process described above are executed. Then, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not "B or D" in the processing of S1814 (S1814: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is set to "2", and this processing ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, a plurality of time saving state end conditions for ending the time saving state are prepared, and a plurality of variation patterns (variation time). As a result, it is possible to further diversify the games during the time-saving state, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the games early. Specifically, when the ratio of selecting the jackpot type to which the time saving state is given after the jackpot is fixed, a short variation pattern is continuously selected as the variation pattern (variation time) selected during the time saving state. In the case, despite the fact that the time saving state was given, it becomes a time saving state that it is difficult to acquire the reserved memory of special figure 2 substantially. In this way, it is possible to vary the substantial time saving state rush ratio by the selection result of the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected special figure 1 variation.

It should be noted that, in the present second embodiment, as a time saving state, set the time saving number of times to 2 times, the variation of the special figure 1 is executed twice, or the variation of the special figure 2 is the time saving state until it is performed once is configured to continue, but the number of time saving times to be set and the conditions for ending the time saving state are not limited to the above-described second embodiment, as long as the same technical idea can be executed. , You may set the number of times of time saving to 3 times or more.

Also, as a time saving end condition, even if you set the number of special figures 1 fluctuations (for example, 5 times) or the number of fluctuations of special figures 2 more times than the number of reserved memories (upper limit 4) of special figures 1 good. As a result, even if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the special figure 2 can be reliably changed during the time saving state, so that the player gets a big hit when entering the time saving state. Games can be provided.

Furthermore, as the time saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 is 2 times, or the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 is 4 times (or the total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 4 times), In addition, as the jackpot type executed when passing through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3) in the small hit type of special figure 2, it is possible to set a jackpot type that gives time reduction and a jackpot type that does not give time reduction. Another example may be used. By configuring in this way, in the case of acquiring one reserved memory of special figure 2 during the special figure 1 variation executed in the first rotation of the time saving, it is executed based on the special figure 2 variation of the second rotation of the time saving Pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game to execute the big hit game, or the specific area (V It is possible for the player to select whether to execute the third time-saving rotation (the second rotation of the special figure 1) without passing the winning switch 650e3).

In other words, in the special figure 1 variation (first preparation period) executed in the first rotation of the time saving, if the game to acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed and one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, The variation of the special figure 2, which is the priority variation, is started in the second rotation of the time saving. When the small hit is won by the variation of the special figure 2, the small hit game is executed after the variation of the second rotation of the time saving is completed. By allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area during the small winning game, a big winning game (V winning big winning) based on the small winning game is started. In this example, as the type of V winning jackpot in special figure 2, it is possible to set a type in which a time saving state is given after a jackpot game and a type in which a time saving state is not given. If the jackpot based on the variation in FIG. 2 is a jackpot that does not give the time-saving state, the consecutive villa mode ends with this jackpot game. Here, the player, in a state where only one reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired, executes a jackpot game in the second rotation of the time reduction, or does not execute a jackpot game in the second rotation of the time reduction (small During the winning game, the special figure 1 variation (second preparation period) executed for the third time reduction is executed, and the new special figure 2 You can choose to play a game that acquires reserved memory.

As a result, based on the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 acquired during the first preparation period, aim to acquire more reserved memories of special figure 2 by discarding one reserved memory of special figure 2, or acquire Since it is possible to select whether or not to surely execute the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2, the player can arbitrarily select game contents suitable for the player.

Furthermore, in this another example, as the type of jackpot executed based on the reservation storage of special figure 2, since it has a type that gives a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game and a type that does not give, special figure 2 When a big winning game (V winning big winning) based on a small winning game is executed with one reserved memory, there is a possibility that the time saving state will end after the big winning game ends. Therefore, depending on which game content the player selects, subsequent game results can be greatly varied, and the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the notification suggesting the type of the big winning game based on the small winning game executed in the second rotation of the time saving mentioned above may be executed by the notification means (for example, the effect display by the third symbol display device 81). As a result, the player can select the game content by referring to the information notified by the notification means. In this case, it is preferable that, as the content of notification by the notification means, the content of the game that is advantageous to the player is notified in a manner that allows the player to comprehend. For example, if the jackpot executed based on the small winning game executed in the second rotation of the time saving is a jackpot in which the time saving state is given after the jackpot game ends, it is preferable to set a notification mode to indicate that. . As a result, the player can safely pass the ball through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the small winning game of the second time-saving rotation.

In addition, in this another example, the time saving end condition is that the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 is 2 times, or the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 is 4 times (or the total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 4 times), only when the hold of the special figure 2 is acquired during the special figure 1 fluctuation executed in the first rotation of the time saving number of times, it is possible to execute the game to select the above-mentioned game content, so the time saving It is possible to motivate the game to acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 as soon as possible after the state is granted.

Also, for the number of fluctuations of special figure 2, because the time saving end condition is set so that the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 is reduced, for example, for the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 executed during the time saving state , it is possible to reduce the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1. As a result, even if a plurality of (for example, two) reserved memories of the special figure 2 are stored during one special figure 1 variation, the second variation of the special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state. can increase the chances of selecting the game content described above. In this example, as a time saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 is 2 times, or the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 is 4 times (or the total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 4 times) However, the time saving end condition based on the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 may be set to increase the number of fluctuations than the time saving end condition based on the number of fluctuations of special figure 1.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 100. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, it is configured to set 3 seconds as the variation time of the normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation) executed during the time saving state, and the normal pattern lottery number executed during the time saving state. was configured to stabilize In addition, in the above-described second embodiment, in order to vary the period during the time-saving state, a plurality of conditions for ending the time-saving state are provided, and furthermore, it is executed during the time-saving state. It was configured so that multiple variable times of Toku-zu 1 could be set.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol executed during the time saving state can be set from a plurality of times, and the normal symbol that can be executed during the time saving state is configured according to the content of the game. It is configured so that the number of lotteries of patterns is varied.

As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to obtain the special figure 2 reservation by executing many lotteries of normal symbols during the time saving state. In addition, since the number of lotteries of normal symbols executed during the time saving state can be varied, it is possible to set the time saving state advantageous to the player and the time saving state disadvantageous to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, a partial configuration of the RAM 203, and an MPU 201 of the main controller 110 , and processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 . Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the content of the game in the third embodiment will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured so that the time saving state provided based on the lottery of the special figure 1 and the time saving state provided based on the lottery of the special figure 2 are different. Furthermore, it is configured such that a different time saving state is provided based on the game state when the time saving state is provided. By providing different time-saving states in this way, it is possible to prepare a plurality of game properties in the time-saving state, and the player can be made to perform a game rich in variety.

Specifically, by setting different time-saving states, the variation time of normal symbols executed during the time-saving state is varied, thereby making the playability during the time-saving state different. That is, as described in the above-described first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 hits the normal symbol during the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time saving state, releases the electric accessory 640a, and makes the second ball entering. Since the game to acquire the special figure 2 reservation is executed by entering the ball into the mouth 640, the number of lotteries of the normal design executed during the time reduction ( number of fluctuations) can be varied.

Further, in the third embodiment, based on the number of times of lottery (number of fluctuations) of normal symbols executed during the time saving state, the variation time of normal symbols is configured to be different. Specifically, when the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) of normal symbols executed during the time saving state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 40 times), a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set. ing. By constructing in this way, by executing many normal symbol variations during the time saving state, it is possible to further increase the number of normal symbol lotteries (variation times) and motivate the player to be in the time saving state. A middle game can be executed. In addition, by shifting to a state in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set, as a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls entering the second ball entrance 640 per unit time. It is possible to provide a game that is advantageous to

In this way, by providing a plurality of time-saving states with different variation times of normal symbols, it is possible to set an advantageous time-saving state and a disadvantageous time-saving state for the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

First, with reference to FIG. 93, the display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the present third embodiment will be described. Fig.93 (a) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen during a time saving state. Here, regarding the display screen shown in FIG. 93(a), differences from the above-described first embodiment (differences from the display contents of FIG. 15(a)) will be described. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 93(a), "39/40" is displayed at the lower right of the first display area Dm. This is a display mode described in the normal figure fluctuation display area for displaying the number of normal figure fluctuations in the time saving state (during the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time saving state), and the value of "39" was executed In the normal pattern fluctuation frequency display mode for showing the number of times, the value of "40" is the normal pattern target fluctuation frequency display mode that indicates the threshold value for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal pattern. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a guidance display is displayed to guide the period until the variation time of the normal symbols becomes short.

The game progresses from the state shown in FIG. 93 (a), and when the number of normal pattern fluctuations in the time saving state reaches 40 times, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the game state in which the normal pattern fluctuation time becomes shorter Characters of "supercharge time entering" are displayed to indicate that the transition has been made, and a guidance display for guiding the player that the normal pattern fluctuation time has been shortened is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 94(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. As for ROM202 of MPU201 of the main control unit 110 in the 3rd Embodiment, the time saving state selection table 202f is added with respect to 1st Embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving state selection table 202f is a table referred to when selecting the time saving state based on the jackpot design (special figure 1 and special figure 2) and the game state stored in the game state storage area 203s, It is referred to in jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 99) to be described later (see S1871 in FIG. 99).

Here, in the third embodiment, as the game state to be set, the time saving A and the time saving B more advantageous to the player than the time saving A are selectable. Specifically, the jackpot pattern is the special pattern 1 (first special pattern), and the game state stored in the game state storage area 203s is normal (that is, the jackpot has been won, or the specific area (V winning In the case of the timing when the ball passes through the switch 650e3), time saving A is selected as the time saving state, and in other cases, time saving B is selected as the time saving state as shown in FIG.

In other words, when the game state is normal state, it becomes a big hit based on the lottery of special figure 1, and only when the time saving state is given after the jackpot game is completed, the time saving A is given as a time saving state, otherwise the time saving state Shorter working hours B is given as.

When the time saving A is set as the time saving state, 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time (see S2409 in FIG. 98), and when the time saving B is set, the normal symbol variation time is time saving. A shorter variation time (2.5 seconds or 1.5 seconds) than when A is set is set (see S2405 and S2406 in FIG. 98). As a result, when entering the continuous mode for the first time, the game is performed during the time saving state in which the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is normal (4 seconds). Fluctuation time can be shorter than usual. Therefore, once the consecutive game mode, which is advantageous to the player, continues, it is possible to make it difficult to shift from the consecutive game mode to the normal game state.

FIG. 94(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment has a game state storage area 203s, a time saving state storage area 203t, and a normal figure number counter 203u added to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game state storage area 203s is an area for storing the game state when the start of the big win is set, and is referred to when selecting the type of time saving state given after the end of the big win. This game state storage area 203s stores the game state (see S271 in FIG. 96) after the start of the big win is set in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 96), and the big win control process 3 (see FIG. 99). ), it is determined to be the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1811 of FIG. 99: Yes), and when the jackpot type is not B or D (S1814 of FIG. 99; No), it is referred to when setting the time saving state (S1871 ).

The time saving state storage area 203t is an area for storing the type of the selected time saving state (time saving A, time saving B), and is referred to when setting the variation time of the normal symbol during the time saving state. This time saving state storage area 203t stores the selected time saving state when the time saving state is selected in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99) (see S1871 in FIG. 99), variable time setting (see FIG. 98 ), the stored information is referred to when setting the variation time of the normal symbol (see S2401 in FIG. 98).

The normal pattern number counter 203u is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the normal pattern during the time saving state, and in the fluctuation time setting process (see FIG. 98), each time the normal pattern is changed during the time saving state. 1 is added (see S2403 in FIG. 98). In the present embodiment, when the value measured by the normal pattern number counter 203u becomes a predetermined value (40), the normal pattern fluctuation time setting process is varied.

<Regarding control processing in the third embodiment>
The control processing in the third embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment in the control processing in the main controller 110 and the sound lamp control device 113. Other processing is the same as in the first embodiment. and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. FIG. In the third embodiment, the special symbol variation processing is changed to the special symbol variation processing 3 (see FIG. 96), and the normal symbol variation processing is changed to the normal symbol variation processing 3 (see FIG. 97). The difference is that the jackpot control process is changed to jackpot control process 3 (FIG. 99). Since other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 3 (see S104 in FIG. 96), the processes of S201 to S219 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above. Store (S271). Then, as in the first embodiment described above, the processes of S220 to S225 are executed, and this process ends.

That is, in the third embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, it is possible to temporarily store the game state at the time when the start of the jackpot is set. Thereby, the game state to be set after the end of the big win game can be set based on the game state at the start of the big win (at the time of winning the big win).

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol has passed, and the game state of the timing for setting the start of the big hit is stored in the game state storage area 203s. (For example, the timing at which the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 96) in the special symbol variation process 3 is executed) may be stored.

Next, in the normal symbol variation process 3 (see S106 in FIG. 97), the processes of S901 to S912 are executed as in the above-described first embodiment, and then the variation time setting process is executed (S951). Here, the variable time setting process (S951) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable time setting process (S951).

When the variable time setting process (S951) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time saving state is time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401), and when it is determined that it is time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401: Yes), normally set the fluctuation time in the design (normal pattern fluctuation time) to 3 seconds (S2409), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the current time saving state is not time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401: No), then the value of the normal figure number counter 203u is greater than "1" is determined (S2402).

In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern number counter 203u is not greater than "1" (S2402: No), the value of the normal pattern number counter 203u is set to "1" (S2403), S2404 to process. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern number counter 203u is greater than "1" (S2402: Yes), the process proceeds to S2404.

In the processing of S2404, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal pattern number counter 203u is "40" or more (S2404). In the processing of S2404, when it is determined that the value of the normal pattern number counter 203u is not "40" or more (less than 40), the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) is set to 2.5 seconds. (S2405). In this case, the fluctuation time shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time set in the process of S2409 is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2404, when it is determined that the value of the normal pattern number counter 203u is "40" or more, the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) is set to 1.5 seconds (S2406). In this case, the fluctuation time shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time set in the process of S2405 is set. Then, when the processing of S2405 or S2406 is completed, "1" is added to the value of the normal pattern number counter 203u (S2407), the normal pattern number command is set (S2408), and this process ends.

The normal figure number command set in the process of S2408 is a command output to the sound lamp control device 113, and is output in the same manner as the various commands set in the main control device 110 described above. .

As described above, in the third embodiment, a different normal pattern fluctuation time is set based on the type of time saving state to be set and the normal pattern fluctuation frequency executed during the time saving state. By configuring in this way, the number of normal figure fluctuations executed during the time saving state can be made different based on the type of the time saving state and the number of normal figure fluctuations executed during the time saving state, and during the time saving state It is possible to improve the amusement of the game in which a player wins a normal figure and acquires the reserved memory of the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

In addition, when "time saving B", which is more advantageous than "time saving A" (a short fluctuation time is set as the normal figure fluctuation time) is set as the time saving state, the number of normal figure fluctuations is a predetermined number or more (40 times or more ), since it is configured so that a shorter normal pattern fluctuation time is set, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game during the time saving state.

In addition, in the third embodiment, it is configured to set a specific normal figure fluctuation time based on each time saving state and normal figure time saving number of times, but it may be configured in other ways, for example, each time saving state and normal Corresponding to the number of figure fluctuations, a general figure fluctuation time selection table is provided to be referred to in order to set the general figure fluctuation time, and from the general figure fluctuation time selection table, based on a predetermined acquired value (for example, counter acquired value) , you may be made to select the normal figure fluctuation time. In this case, a table in which a long normal pattern fluctuation time is likely to be selected and a table in which a short normal pattern fluctuation time is likely to be selected are provided in the normal pattern fluctuation time selection table corresponding to each time saving state and the number of normal pattern fluctuation times. So, as in the third embodiment, it is possible to vary the normal figure fluctuation time that is likely to be selected based on each time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) and the number of normal figure fluctuations, and the reserved memory of special figure 2 It is possible to improve the interest in the game to acquire.

In addition, in the third embodiment, two types of "time saving A" and "time saving B" are provided as types of the time saving state, but more types may be provided. In addition, although one opportunity for differentiating the normal pattern fluctuation time selected based on the normal pattern fluctuation frequency is provided (the normal pattern fluctuation frequency is 40 times), two or more may be provided.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, it is configured so that a normal pattern fluctuation time shorter than usual is selected (made easier to be) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, but a specific upper limit condition (for example, normal pattern When the number of fluctuations exceeds 50 times, or when the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 reaches the upper limit), a longer time than usual as the normal figure fluctuation time selected (for example, 10 seconds ) may be selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the excessive awarding of benefits to the player due to the excessive execution of the normal pattern variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 3 (S1704). This jackpot control process 3 (S1704) differs from the jackpot control process of the above-described first embodiment in that processing is added when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot. is executed. Description of the same processing is omitted.

When the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1814 are executed in the same manner as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment, and in the process of S1814, the jackpot type is "jackpot B" or "jackpot D (That is, when it is determined that the time saving state is given after the end of the jackpot) (S1814: No), the time saving state is set based on the time saving state selection table 202f, and the set time saving state is set. Stored in the time saving state storage area 203t (S1871). Then, the value of the time-saving counter 203g is set to "1" (S1815), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the command determination process is changed to command determination process 3 (see FIG. 100). Since other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 (S3112). When this command determination process 3 (S3112) is executed, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are executed as in the command determination process of the first embodiment. Then, if it is determined that the notification command has not been received in the processing of S3213 (S3213: No), then it is determined whether or not the general pattern number command has been received (S3251). When the general figure number command is received (S3251: Yes), the general figure number command for display is set (S3252). The normal figure frequency command for display set here is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as other display commands, and the normal figure fluctuation executed during the time saving state on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The number of times is displayed (see FIG. 93).

<Modification 1 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, Modification 1 of the game board 13 in each embodiment described above will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 2 in the above-described first embodiment, in order to restrict the ball from entering the right first ball inlet 64b provided in the right area of the game board 13, the storage device 750 and a non-electric accessory 710 were provided. This reliably prevents the ball from entering the right first ball entrance 64b unless the non-electric accessory 710 is in an open state. On the other hand, in Modification 1, a configuration is used that restricts the entry of a ball into the right first ball entrance 64b without using the storage device 750 and the non-electric accessory 710. FIG. Specifically, by providing a constantly movable valve 1500 above the right first ball entrance 64b, entry of the ball into the right first ball entrance 64b is restricted.

In addition, in the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are provided in the first flow path 701, and the ball passes through the through gate 67. The second ball entrance below the through gate 67 so that the ball passes in a shorter period (0.2 seconds) than the fluctuation time (3 or 4 seconds) of the normal pattern (normal pattern) executed based on By arranging 640 , the ball passing through the through gate 67 is prevented from directly entering the second ball entrance 640 . On the other hand, in this modified example, the through gate 67 is provided in the first flow path 701 and the second ball inlet 640 is provided in the second flow path 702 . As a result, it is possible to physically prevent the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second ball entrance 640 .

The difference between the configuration of the game board 13 in Modification 1 and the configuration of the game board 13 in the above-described first embodiment is that the storage device 750, the non-electric accessory 710, and the specific general ball entrance 630 are eliminated. , the arrangement position of the right first ball entrance 64 b is changed, and the arrangement position of the second ball entrance 640 is changed from the first flow path 701 to the second flow path 702 . Other configurations are the same. The same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 101 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of Modification 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 101, in the game board 13 of Modification 1, a normally movable member 1500 is provided along the most upstream ball rolling surface of the first flow path 701, and the normally movable member 1500 is movable to the open position (in the open state), a ball can enter the right first ball inlet 64b.

The operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will now be described in detail. This normally movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the pachinko machine 10 being powered on. there is Specifically, in the movable member driving process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main controller 110, motion control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. It is In this movable scenario, the movable member 1500 is constantly opened for 0.1 seconds and then closed for 1.2 seconds, and is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of Modification 1, the ball fired in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and the rolling ball on which the movable member 1500 is always arranged is provided. It flows downstream while rolling on the surface. When the timing at which this ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) coincides with the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is in an open state, The ball passes through the normally movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entrance 64b.

The timing at which the constantly movable member 1500 rolls (or falls on the constantly movable member) is every 1.2 seconds. Since it is 0.1 second, the timing at which the two coincide is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls enter the right first ball entrance 64b in one minute.

That is, in a game state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b periodically, so that the jackpot game is performed. When it ends and shifts to the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state where there is no suspension of special figure 1. In addition, as the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened once, a period (0.1 second) during which it is difficult for the player to aim is set. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aiming at the mouth 64a.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, if a left-handed game is played, about 15 of the 250 balls that are shot will enter the first left ball entrance 64a. It is designed, and five prize balls are paid out when a ball enters. Also, it is designed so that about five balls enter the general ball entrance 63, and five prize balls are paid out when the balls enter. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, considering that the paid out prize balls are fired again, it is possible to make about 20 balls enter the first left ball entrance 64a. becomes.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state, when a right-handed game is played, out of the 250 balls that are shot, about 9 are designed to enter the right first ball entrance 64b. If the ball is entered, two prize balls will be paid out. Moreover, the general ball entrance 63 is not provided in the right area. Therefore, in a right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, even if it is considered that the paid-out prize balls are fired again, about 10 balls are allowed to enter the right first ball entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the right-handed game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game area (right side area) through which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes is not provided with the general ball entrance 63. The general ball entrance 63 may be provided based on a design concept to the extent that the game is not more advantageous to the player. As a result, the number of balls paid out as prize balls can be increased in the right-handed game during the time-saving state or during the jackpot state.

Next, among the structures arranged in the right region of the game board 13 in Modification 1, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are different from the structure of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. We will focus on points.

In Modified Example 1, a through gate 67 is provided downstream of a first flow path 701 having a curved path 701a, and a second inlet is provided downstream of a second flow path 702 (lower end of a fifth flow path 704b). A ball mouth 640 is provided. With this configuration, the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 can flow down toward the second ball inlet 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without lowering the flow velocity. Therefore, since the interval between the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702 and a plurality of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 at the same time. can be suppressed. Also, when the third symbol display device 81 informs that the electric accessory 640a is open (see FIG. 23(b)) without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, A ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, different flow paths (first flow path 701, first flow path 701, 2nd flow path 702), when the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that the balls flow down only to one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second ball entrance It is possible to make it difficult to enter the ball into 640 . In other words, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed, creating a state in which the balls flow down only in one flow path. By doing so, it becomes possible to create a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a situation in which it is easy to

<Modification 2 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, Modification 2 of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 2 in the above-described first embodiment, in order to restrict the ball from entering the right first ball inlet 64b provided in the right area of the game board 13, the storage device 750 and a non-electric accessory 710 were provided. This reliably prevents the ball from entering the right first ball entrance 64b unless the non-electric accessory 710 is in an open state. On the other hand, in the second modification, a constantly movable plate 1700 is provided between the storage device 750 and the specific general ball entrance 630, and when the storage device 750 is released, the ball that has passed through the storage device 750 A case where the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 and a case where the ball does not enter are provided.

Specifically, the normally movable plate 1700 is variable every second between a guided position (protruding position) where the ball can be guided to the specific general ball entrance 630 and an open position (retracted position) where guidance is impossible (difficult). A variable control means is provided so that the flow of balls passing through the storage device 750 can be controlled by the variable control by the variable control means.

The normally movable plate 1700 is controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 . Specifically, a movable plate solenoid (not shown) that variably operates the movable plate 1700 is turned on (a state in which the movable plate 1700 is always projected) and an off state (a state in which the movable plate 1700 is always retracted). A predetermined variable scenario is provided based on a predetermined counter value that is updated each time the main processing of main controller 110 is executed by the variable control means. Variable control along is executed.

It should be noted that the movable plate solenoid used in this modified example is configured so that the movable plate 1700 is always positioned at the retracted position when energized. This is, as described in each of the above-described embodiments, as a condition for ending the game period that is advantageous to the player (the time saving state period in which it is easy to acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2), the first This is because the condition is set that the variation (lottery) of the special symbol (special figure 1) is executed once. In other words, unless this end condition is met, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern (normal pattern) will be shorter than the normal state (normal pattern fluctuation time 3 seconds), and the normal pattern (normal pattern) will be executed if you win. This is because the opening operation pattern (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is continuously executed for the opening operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a to be executed. As described above, in a state where there is no reserved memory of special figure 1, variation of each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired. No (time saving standby state), only the variation of the normal pattern (normal pattern) will be executed. In this case, the time saving state is continued until the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 after being elected per normal figure. In order to prevent such a situation from being intentionally created, the movable plate 1700 is always positioned at the projecting position when the power to the movable valve solenoid is turned off. As a result, even if an act of intentionally stopping the supply of power to the movable valve solenoid is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious damage.

In the configuration of this modified example described above, the timing at which the storage device 750 is released (that is, the timing at which the jackpot game is started) and the variable state of the constantly movable plate 1700 allow the ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64b. ball entry can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect at what timing the jackpot game will be started.

A configuration may be added to the present modified example described above so that different timings can be set as the timing for bringing the storage device 750 into the released state. Specifically, according to the jackpot type selected when the special pattern (special pattern) jackpot is won, the jackpot type that releases the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 and the jackpot type that is not released are set in advance, Furthermore, as the jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a, the first timing (for example, the timing of the start of the first round) and the second timing (for example, the timing of the start of the third round) are set in advance. Configure.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the storage device 750 is released and the ball passes through the storage device 750 can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the timing when the jackpot game is started and the variable state of the constantly movable plate 1700 are the timings advantageous to the player, and the player can continue to play even after the jackpot game is started. can be made to play a game with a sense of anticipation. In addition, it is possible to suppress the act of starting a jackpot game at an advantageous timing for the player.

In addition, you may use the structure which sets the presence or absence of release|release of the storage apparatus 750 mentioned above, and a plurality of release timings according to a jackpot classification to each embodiment mentioned above. As a result, it is possible to provide a more complicated game and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 3 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, modification 3 of the game board 13 in the above-described first embodiment will be described. The third modification differs from the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment in that the arrangement positions of the storage device 750 and the specific general ball entrance 630 are different. are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 103 , in Modification 3, the storage device 750 and the specific general ball entrance 630 are arranged on the right side of the central lower portion of the game board 13 . By configuring in this way, it is easier to store the balls in the storage device 750 in the right-handed game than in the left-handed game. Specifically, among the balls shot in the right-handed game, the balls that flow down on the first variable winning device 65 are most likely to be stored in the storage device 750 .

In a state in which balls are stored in the storage device 750, subsequent balls flow down above the stored ball. Specifically, the position of the upper surface of the balls stored in the storage device 750 is below the flowing direction extension line of the balls flowing down on the first variable winning device 65 (the first variable winning device 65 A storage device 750 is disposed so as to have a downward step with respect to the upper surface of the unit provided. Therefore, the spheres stored in the storage device 750 do not affect the flow of subsequent spheres. In this modified example 3 configured in this way, when a right-handed game that is advantageous to the player is started, it is possible to secure the reservation of the special figure 1 more reliably.

Each modified example of the game board 13 described above may be applied to each embodiment described above. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a more complicated game, and to improve the interest of the player.

<Modified Example of Electric Accessory 640a>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, modified examples of the electric accessory 640a used in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In each of the above-described embodiments, the game board in which the second ball entrance 640 is arranged so that two or more balls are not allowed to enter the second ball entrance 640 while the electric accessory 640a is being opened. It was configured to regulate the ball flow in the right side area of 13. In other words, measures are taken to regulate the flow of balls so that a plurality of balls do not continuously flow into the electric accessory 640a at the same time. On the other hand, the electric accessory A200 described in this modified example has a configuration in which two or more balls cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the shutter portion A222 has a cross section orthogonal to the rotating shaft portions 223, 223 that is curved in a substantially "<" shape, and the rotating door A220 opens the side start winning opening A40A. It consists of a door main wall A222A which is located on the front side and stands substantially vertically in the closed state, and a winning auxiliary wall A222B which extends rearward from the upper end of the door main wall A222 in this state. The door main wall A222A has a V-shaped cross section to prevent game balls from being caught. Further, the door main wall A222A is positioned apart from the pivot shafts 223, 223, and rotates forward from a substantially horizontal state as the pivot door A220 rotates from the open state to the closed state. It will be in a state of standing almost vertically. The auxiliary winning wall A222B is inclined downward toward the inner side of the side start winning opening A40A when the rotating door A220 is open.

Also, the width of the shutter part A222 is slightly narrower than the width of the side start winning opening A40A, while the width of the pair of side walls is wider than the width of the side starting winning opening A40A. When the rotating door A220 is completely closed, the front surface of the side wall abuts the side edge of the side start winning opening A40A, and the rotating door A220 further closes the side starting winning opening A40A. prevents it from rotating.

Of the pair of side walls, door rotation protrusions A224 and A224 are provided on the side opposite to the shutter section across the rotation shaft. Further, the side walls are formed with positioning abutment portions A225, A225 which are located behind the door rotation protrusion A224 and protrude downward when the rotation door A220 is in the fully opened open end position. ing.

A detection sensor is housed in the above-described switch housing portion 215B of the resin housing. The detection sensor has a flat rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a game ball passage hole is vertically formed through the rear end thereof. Through holes are formed on both upper and lower surfaces of the switch housing portion 215B corresponding to the game ball passage holes, and a game ball entering the tongue piece housing portion 215A passes through the game ball passage hole 281 to receive the switch. It is designed to move below the portion 215B. A duct (not shown) for taking in game balls and guiding them to the ball circulation system of the game hall is provided below the switch housing portion 215B.

A movable tongue piece A230 is accommodated in the tongue piece accommodating portion 215A of the resin housing. The movable tongue A230 has a flat structure that is shorter in the width direction than in the front-rear direction and thinner in the vertical direction, and is supported so as to slide back and forth while being in sliding contact with the inner surface of the tongue accommodating portion 215A.

When viewed from above, the movable tongue A230 has a bilaterally symmetrical shape, and the front end thereof is provided with a protruding and retracting protruding piece that is narrower than the whole in a stepped manner. The protruding piece is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball and has a width that allows it to be inserted into the lower wide portion of the side start winning opening A40A.

A pair of outer descending inclined surfaces 240S, 240S inclined downward to both sides are formed on both sides in the width direction of the upper surface of the projecting piece. In addition, between the pair of outer descending inclined surfaces 240S, 240S of the projecting piece portion, there is a pull-in inclined surface which is very gently inclined so as to descend toward the center and also gradually inclined so as to descend rearward. 240H is formed. Furthermore, a guiding inclined surface 240Y that descends relatively steeply rearward from the rear end of the retracting inclined surface 240H is formed on the upper surface of the projecting piece.

When viewed from above, the movable tongue A230 has a trapezoidal projection 231D projecting rearward from the center in the width direction of the rear end of the substantially square base. there is A ball passage elongated hole is vertically formed through the center of the base portion in the width direction from the front end position to the rear end position. The ball passage elongated hole has a width that allows just one game ball to pass through and is slightly smaller than the width of the projecting piece. The front end of the ball passage slot is semicircular and partially reaches the base end of the projecting piece, and the rear end of the ball passage slot is parallel to the base of the trapezoidal projection 231D. It has reached the position near the rear end of the base portion.

A pair of doors extending vertically along both side edges of the ball-passing long hole are provided in the movable tongue A230 from the base end of the protruding projecting piece to the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the base. A driving projecting wall is formed to protrude. The entire rear side portion of the base portion from the door drive protrusion is a power receiving portion A230P that is thickened in the vertical direction so as to have an upper surface flush with the upper surface of the rear end portion of the door drive protrusion.

A pair of connecting recesses are recessedly formed on the opposing inner side surfaces of the power receiving portion A230P that face each other across the ball passage slot. Each connecting recess is composed of a substantially triangular interference avoiding recess narrowed at the lower end side, and an engagement groove extending vertically by being recessed in the inner surface of the interference avoiding recess on the side away from the ball passage slot. Become. A front side sliding contact surface 236A arranged on the front side of the engaging groove portion extends straight in the vertical direction. The rear slide contact surface 236B, which is arranged on the rear side of the engagement groove portion, has a lower portion projected forward from the middle position in the vertical direction, and serves as a seesaw stopper portion according to the present invention. A stopper contact surface 237S at the upper end of the seesaw stopper portion is slightly inclined downward toward the front sliding contact surface 236A.

Each door driving protrusion has an intermediate recessed portion at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction. It is a protrusion A242. The rear pressing projection A242 has the same height as the power receiving portion A230P, and the front pressing projection A241 is lower than the power receiving portion A230P. Further, the bottom surface of the intermediate recessed portion is a horizontal and flat intermediate recessed flat surface 233N. The rear surface of the front side pressing projection A241 is the closing pressing portion A241K according to the present invention, which rises vertically from the intermediate recessed flat surface 233N. Further, the upper surface of the front side pressing protrusion A241 is a door stopper portion A241J according to the present invention, and is horizontally flat. On the other hand, the front surface of the rear pressing projection A242 is an opening pressing portion A242Z according to the present invention, which also rises vertically from the intermediate recessed flat surface 233N. The front surface of the front pressing protrusion A241 is parallel to the closing pressing portion A241K, which is the rear surface, and gently slopes forward from the middle to extend to the rear end of the outer downward slope surfaces 240S and 240S. .

The lower end of the seesaw member A250 is engaged with the connecting concave portion of the movable tongue A230, and the door rotation projections A224 and A224 of the rotation door A220 are engaged with the door drive protrusions of the movable tongue A230. are doing. As a result, the movable tongue A230 receives power from the solenoid via the seesaw member A250 and is driven, and the movable tongue A230 receives power and drives the rotary door A220.

First, the transmission of power from the seesaw member A250 to the movable tongue A230 will be described. The connecting arms of the seesaw member A250 are received in the interference avoiding concave portions of the connecting concave portions of the movable tongue A230, and the lower end connecting convex portions A255 and A255 of the connecting arms are received in the engaging groove portions of the connecting concave portions. engaged.

Here, when the solenoid is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 104, and at this time the lower end connecting projections A255, A255 are positioned at the lower ends of the engaging grooves. At this time, the movable tongue piece A230 is arranged at the rear end position of the range of possible direct movement, and the projecting piece portion is retreated to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A. In this case, that is, in a state in which the projecting piece retreats to the back side of the side start winning prize port A40A, the tip of the projecting projecting piece retreats to a position where it is completely covered inside the side start winning prize port A40A. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from colliding with the side start winning opening A40A in the retracted state.

When the solenoid is energized from this state and the plunger is attracted rearward, the seesaw member A250 rotates about the rotation shafts A253, A253, and the connecting arm rotates forward. The lower end connecting protrusions A255, A255 press the front sliding surfaces 236A, 236A forward while slidingly contacting the front sliding surfaces 236A, 236A. As a result, the movable tongue piece A230 is pushed forward of the game machine, and as shown in FIG. 104, the projecting piece protrudes from the side start winning opening A40A to the front side of the game board. Then, for example, the end surface of the base portion of the movable tongue A230 abuts the opening edge of the side start winning opening A40A from the rear side, and the movable tongue A230 is positioned at the "front end operating position" according to the present invention and stopped. Then, the projecting piece portion 240 projects to the maximum extent from the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 106).

When the solenoid is deenergized with the movable tongue A230 at the front end operating position (the state shown in FIG. 106), the compression coil spring A276 causes the plunger to protrude forward. Then, the lower end of the seesaw member A250 rotates toward the rear of the game machine around the rotation shafts A253 and A253, and the lower end of the seesaw member A250 moves from the front position to the rear position relative to the rotation shafts A253 and A253. Moving. At this time, the lower end connecting protrusions A255, A255 are pushed rearward by sliding contact with the rear sliding contact surfaces 236B, 236B of the engaging groove. As a result, the movable tongue piece is drawn to the rear of the game machine, and the projecting piece portion retracts to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 107).

Specifically, when the excitation of the solenoid is stopped and the lower end of the connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 rotates rearward, the upper edge portion E1 (the upper edge portion E1) of the stopper concave portion provided in the lower end connecting convex portion A255 (first 1 plane M1) contacts the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper portion. Then, as the seesaw member A250 rotates, the lower end connecting protrusion A255 comes into sliding contact with the rear sliding contact surface 236B, and the lower end connecting protrusion A255 is positioned behind the rotating shafts A253, A253 of the seesaw member A250. At this time, the lower edge portion E2 of the stopper recess (the lower edge of the second plane M2) comes into contact with the portion of the rear sliding contact surface 236B below the seesaw stopper portion, causing the rear sliding contact of the engagement groove portion. The contact surfaces 236B, 236B are pushed backward. As a result, the elastic force of the compression coil spring A276 can return the movable tongue to the initial position (rear end retracted position).

By the way, if the movable tongue A230 retracted in the inner part of the side start winning opening A40A is pulled out to the front of the game board by using a wire or the like inserted through the gap of the game machine, the following actions will be taken. become that way. That is, power is not transmitted from the solenoid to the seesaw member A250, but power is transmitted from the movable tongue A230 to the seesaw member A250, and the connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 is pushed forward by the rear sliding contact surface 236B of the engagement groove portion 236. Then, the first plane M1 in each stopper concave portion of the lower end connecting convex portions A255, A255 and the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper portion come into surface contact. From this state, when the movable tongue piece A230 is further pulled forward, the pulling force becomes an upward force F1 perpendicular to the stopper contact surface 237S of the stepped portion, and the center of the first plane M1 and the rotation shaft portion are aligned. It faces in a direction substantially parallel to the direction connecting the center of A253, that is, in a direction substantially perpendicular to the rotation direction of the stopper concave portion. As a result, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is restricted, and it becomes impossible to pull the movable tongue piece A230 forward to project the retractable projecting piece portion forward of the side start winning opening A40A. Further, even if the seesaw member A250 is slightly lifted obliquely upward by the upward force F1, the triangular ridge formed on the connecting wall 252 of the seesaw member A250 engages with the flange portion 274F of the plunger. As a result, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is more reliably prohibited.

Next, the transmission of power from the movable tongue A230 to the rotating door A220 will be described. The door driving protrusions A224 and A224 of the rotating door A220 are engaged with the door driving protrusions of the movable tongue, whereby the rotating door A220 receives power from the movable tongue A230 and rotates. do. Specifically, in a state in which the movable tongue A230 is arranged at the rear end retracted position, and the entire protruding/retracting protrusion is retracted to the inner side of the side start winning opening A40A, the door rotation protrusion A224 is pushed forward. It is arranged above the door stopper portion A241J in the projecting portion 241 (state shown in FIG. 104). At this time, the pivot shaft portion of the pivot door A220 is located diagonally forward of the door pivot protrusion A224. At this time, a first space AS1 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door rotating protrusion A224 and the opening pressing portion A242Z of the rear pressing protrusion A242.

Then, when the movable tongue A230 advances from the rear end retracted position, the front side pressing projection A241 moves forward as shown in the changes from FIGS. The door stopper portion A241J of the front pressing protrusion A241 is no longer opposed to the door stopper portion A241J in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion of the door rotating protrusion A224 faces the intermediate recessed flat surface 233N in the vertical direction. A rotation space for the door rotation protrusion A224 is secured between .

When the movable tongue A230 moves further forward, the lower end of the door rotation protrusion A224 moves in the first space AS1. remains stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 105, when the projecting piece of the movable tongue piece A230 protrudes by a predetermined amount from the side start winning opening A40A, the lower end of the door turning projection A224 is pushed out of the rear pressing projection A242. It abuts on the front surface A242Z. As the movable tongue further advances, the main door wall A222A of the rotating door A220 is lifted, the side starting prize opening A40A is opened (see FIGS. 105 and 106), and the movable tongue A230 moves forward. When the operation position is reached, the rotating door A220 is fully opened, and the game ball can enter the side start winning opening A40A. More specifically, when the rotating door A220 is pushed by the rear pressing protrusion A242 and rotates by a certain angle, it rotates toward the open end position due to its own weight. That is, the rotating door A220 starts to rotate when the protruding piece protrudes about half from the side start winning opening A40A, and until the protruding protruding piece protrudes about half and then completely protrudes. In a relatively short period of time, the side start winning opening A40A changes from the fully closed state to the fully opened state. As described above, in this embodiment, the movable tongue A230 starts moving forward, the rotating door A220 is stopped halfway, and the rotating door A220 starts to open halfway. The mouth A40A is opened. Then, when the game ball falls on the upper surface of the haunting projecting piece part 240 projecting from the side starting winning opening A40A, the game ball is guided by the haunting projecting piece part 240 and enters the side starting winning opening A40A to win the prize. A game ball is detected by a detection switch.

When the rotating door A220 is completely open, as shown in FIG. 106, the positioning contact portion A225 of the side wall abuts the upper surface of the rear pressing projection A242, and the rotating door A220 is at the open end. position. This restricts rattling of the swing door A220. Also, in this state, a second space AS2 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end of the door rotation projection A224 and the opening pressing portion A242Z of the rear side pressing projection A242.

Further, when the movable tongue piece A230 retreats from the front end operating position, the front side pressing protrusion A241 moves rearward as shown in the change from FIG. 106 to FIG. At this time, the lower end of the door rotation projection A224 relatively moves toward the front pressing projection A241 in the second space AS2. As a result, a part of the projecting piece 240 of the movable tongue piece A230 moves into the front opening winning opening A40A (the door rotating projection A224 hits the closing pressing portion A241K from the state of contacting the opening pressing portion A242Z). (moves in the second space AS2 until it touches), the swing door A220 is maintained in an open state. Then, the movable tongue A230 opens the front by a predetermined amount (the distance that the door rotation projection A224 moves in the second space AS2 from the state where the door rotation protrusion A224 abuts on the opening pressing portion A242Z until it abuts on the closing pressing portion A241K). When moved into the opening A40A, the closing pressing portion A241K of the front pressing protrusion A241 abuts the lower end portion of the door rotation protrusion A224. At this time, about half of the projecting piece 240 of the movable tongue piece A230 is accommodated in the side start winning opening A40A. Further, when the movable tongue A230 retreats further, the rotating door A220 is operated to close as the movable tongue A230 retreats. The side start winning opening A40A is completely closed and stopped, and the movable tongue piece A230 is further retracted on the far side of the side starting winning opening A40A, and the lower end of the door rotation protrusion A224 is vertically aligned with the door stopper portion A241J. Return to the initial state facing in the direction. In this way, in this embodiment, the movable tongue A230 starts retreating, the rotating door 220 is stopped halfway, and the rotating door A220 starts to close halfway. Mouth A40A is closed.

By the way, when the side start winning opening A40A is closed (the state shown in FIG. 104), for example, if an attempt is made to open the rotating door A220 with a wire or the like, the door rotating projection A224 rotates to the opening side. , and the door stopper portion A241J of the front side pressing protrusion A241 in the vertical direction. This prohibits unauthorized opening of the swing door A220. Here, the direction of the force of the door rotation projection A224 pushing the door stopper portion A241J of the front side pressing projection A241 is in the vertical direction, and is orthogonal to the movable direction (front-rear direction) of the movable tongue A230. Therefore, when an unauthorized external force is applied to the rotating door A220, the door stopper portion A241J of the movable tongue A230 is not moved in the movable direction, thereby reliably preventing unauthorized opening of the rotating door A220. can be done.

<Another production example 1 using the configuration of each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, another example of effect executed using the configuration of each embodiment described above will be described. In the second embodiment described above, as the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. It was configured to display the number of reservations for each pattern) and each pattern. On the other hand, in the example of effect described with reference to FIG. 108, the effect of displaying the symbol display of special figure 1 and the number of reservations in the sub-display area Ds is executed. In this sub-display area Ds, the pattern of the special figure 1 is changed (the special figure 1 variation is being executed). , The number of pending special figures 1 is configured to be displayed in a suggestive display mode that suggests the display mode to be displayed next in a variable display mode. Here, with reference to FIG. 108(a), the content of this example of effect will be described.

The display screen of FIG. 108(a) is a display screen showing an example of the case of no special figure 1 reservation during the special figure 1 variation during the time saving state (first time saving). As shown in FIG. 108(a), in the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds, "remaining time seconds" is displayed as an auxiliary display mode for giving meaning to the variable situation of the variable display mode. A display of "10" is displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a variable display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is being changed. By varying the display mode displayed in this variable display area Ds4 ("10" in FIG. 108(a)), it is configured to notify that the special figure 1 is fluctuating during the variable display. there is

In addition, the display mode (for example, "10") displayed in the variable display area Ds4 while the special figure 1 is fluctuating prevents the player from misunderstanding that the variation of the special figure 1 has stopped in that display mode. In order to prevent this, the display mode is changed to the next display mode after the temporary stop display is performed for a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) during which the player can recognize the display mode in a slightly swaying state. Then, the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 when the variation of the special figure 1 stops (for example, "∞" (see FIG. 108 (b))) is the player can use the special figure 1 in that display mode. In order to recognize that the fluctuation has stopped, it is configured to stop for a longer period (for example, 1 second) than the temporary stop display (for example, 0.5 seconds).

With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the content of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. In addition, as long as the player can easily understand the content of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4, other configurations may be used. , In the period when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed, the color of the background image of the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 is changed, the display content of the auxiliary display mode is changed, and the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 You can change the color of the text and the thickness of the text. This allows the player to easily comprehend the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4.

Further, according to the configuration used in the present production example, by the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4, that the special figure 1 is fluctuating, and the fluctuation remaining period of the special figure 1 can be notified ing. Thereby, in one display area (variable display area Ds4), it is possible to display a plurality of information related to the variation of the special figure 1.

In addition, in this production example, in order to notify the player that the special figure 1 is fluctuating, the production display that counts down the time in the special figure 1 fluctuation display area Ds3 is executed. A configuration may be used, and for example, a story development type presentation such as presentation of answering a question or presentation of accomplishing a mission may be used. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the special figure 1 is changing by varying the contents displayed in the special figure 1 variation display area Ds3.

Then, of the sub-display area Ds, in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5, the number suggestion mode for indicating the number of reservations of special figure 1 is displayed based on the number of reservations of special figure 1 (Fig. 108 ( a) see). This pending number suggesting mode is displayed in a display mode that suggests a display mode to be displayed in the variable display area Ds4 from the next time onward. In other words, the display mode displayed corresponding to each pending number suggestion mode is changed together every time the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 is changed.

According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a), in the special figure 1 pending display area Ds5, four pending number suggestion modes are displayed, respectively "V", "9", "∞" either is displayed. The display mode displayed as the pending number suggestion mode suggests the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as described above, and the "V" display mode is the lottery result of the special figure 1. The "9" display mode suggests the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1, and the "∞" display mode suggests that there is no reserved memory of the special figure 1.

According to the game state shown in FIG. 108(a), since there is no reserved memory of special figure 1, display setting is made so that the number of "∞" displayed increases as the reserved number suggestion mode. In this way, the display mode of each pending number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 pending display area Ds5 is the lottery result of the special figure 1 during fluctuation, the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 during fluctuation, and the special figure Since the display content is set based on the number of reserved balls of 1, the player plays the game while predicting the future progress of the game based on the display mode displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5. It can be carried out.

According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a), four pending number suggestion modes are displayed, but this display number is always four pending number suggestion modes regardless of the number of holds of special figure 1 It is configured so that In other words, in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is notified (suggested) to the player by the display content of each reserved number suggestion mode, not the display number of the reserved number suggestion mode. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the current number of pending games.

In addition, in this production example, the display number of the pending number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 pending display area Ds5 is always configured to display 4 (regardless of the number of pending special figures 1), Other configurations may be used, for example, based on the number of reservations of special figure 1, the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1, and the lottery result of special figure 1, it is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5 The display number of the pending number suggestion mode may be varied. In this case, for example, when the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 becomes shorter (for example, when the remaining time is 10 seconds), so that the display number of the pending number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 pending display area Ds5 decreases Good to configure. As a result, the options predicted by the player can be reduced, and the player's prediction accuracy can be improved.

Furthermore, as in the above-described second embodiment, when there is no reserved number of the special figure 1 at the time the time saving state ends, in the gaming machine configured so that a game advantageous to the player is executed, By suggesting (displaying) the existence or non-existence of the reserved number of the special figure 1 as in this production example, it is possible to execute the game in the time saving state while making the player expect until the end.

Then, when the effect display of FIG. 108(a) elapses and the variation of the special figure 1 stops, the display screen shown in FIG. 108(b) is displayed. The display screen of FIG. 108 (b) is a display screen showing an example of the case where neither special figure 1 nor special figure 2 is held in a state where the variation of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is stopped. be. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the first time saving is completed in the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 without reservation, the special symbol fluctuation is not started (the special figure fluctuation of the second rotation of the time saving without starting), it will be in short waiting time. During this time-saving standby, by continuously executing the right-handed game, normal symbols are continuously varied (lottery), and a game in which a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 is executed.

In the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to FIG. 2, even if a right-handed game is executed during the time saving state, the ball does not enter the right first ball entrance 64b, so FIG. 108(b) is a game state in which the time-saving state is maintained continuously until the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 . On the display screen, the general pattern main pattern Dmc corresponding to the normal pattern is variably displayed in the first display area Dm, and in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5, instead of the display showing the number of reserved special figures 1, is in the time-saving standby, the characters "super release mode rush" are displayed, and in the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3, as a display indicating that the special figure 1 has not changed, in the variable display area Ds4 Characters of "Remaining time ∞ seconds" in which the display mode of "∞" is stopped and displayed are displayed.

As described above, according to the production example described above, the display mode of displaying the fluctuation situation (lottery result, remaining fluctuation time) of special figure 1 in the time saving state and the number of reservations of special figure 1 on the display screen. Since the effect is displayed so as to predict the progress of the game after that, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the above-described example of production, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 shift to a time-saving standby state that can occur in a state without holding ("∞" display mode is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Ds4) Although the effect display for suggesting is also executed, the determination of whether or not to execute this effect display is determined based on the number of pending memories of special figures 1 and 2 (presence or absence of suspension) Also good, for example, if the number of reserved storage of special figure 2 is 1 or more, it is preferable not to execute the above-mentioned effect display.

In the above-described first embodiment, when both the game state at the timing when the normal symbol variation (lottery) is executed and the game state at the timing for setting the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a are in the time saving state, Although it is configured to set an operation pattern (long open) that is advantageous to the player as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, other configurations may be used, for example, variation of normal symbols (lottery) is executed. It is also possible to use the timing at which it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (the timing at which the judgment condition is established) instead of the timing at which the judgment is made by the judging means.

Also, the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed (the timing at which the operation means executes the operation) is not the timing at which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set (the timing at which the operation mode is set by the operation mode setting means). ) may be used.

Further, when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a causes the electric accessory 640a to operate multiple times, the content of each operation may be determined at each timing when each operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed. . Specifically, as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, there is an operation pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened three times. When the period is set to 2 seconds, and when an operation pattern disadvantageous to the player (short opening) is set, each opening period is set to 0.2 seconds, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is long opening. is set, and when the time saving state ends between the second opening and the third opening, the opening period may be set to 0.2 seconds only for the third opening. By configuring in this way, while the electric accessory 640a is operated so as to be advantageous to the player until the end during the time saving state that is advantageous to the player, after the game state shifts to the normal state, the player It is possible to make it easier to suppress providing an excessively advantageous state to

In this case, only the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be set in advance, and the opening period may be set at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened according to the operation pattern. Without setting the motion pattern of the object 640a, the timing of starting the motion of the electric accessory 640a and the details of the motion may be individually controlled for each motion.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second ball entrance 640 while the electric accessory 640a is open, the balls enter the second ball entrance 640. The entry of one ball into the second ball opening 640 is set as a condition for terminating the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, and in order to prevent multiple balls from entering the second ball opening 640 at the same time. Distributing means for distributing balls alternately between a flow path (first flow path) and a flow path (second flow path) in which a ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 is provided, and the first flow path is provided. Although it was configured so that the interval between the spheres flowing down was wide. Other configurations may be added to more reliably prevent multiple balls from entering the second ball entrance 640 at the same time.

For example, a gear-type sprocket mechanism is provided on the upstream side of the second ball entrance 640 in the passage (first passage) that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. Even if a plurality of balls continuously flow down the path, the sprocket mechanism may guide the balls one by one to the downstream side, thereby widening the falling interval of the balls. As a result, it is possible to physically prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second ball entrance 640 at the same time. In this way, if a ball feeding member is provided upstream of the second ball inlet 640 to feed the balls downstream so that the ball flow interval is constant, the distribution member described above does not have to be used. . Also, the ball feeding member may have a structure other than the above-described sprocket mechanism. For example, a magnetic body that can move in a constant motion is provided, and the ball is sent (flowed down) at a predetermined timing depending on the movement position of the magnetic body. ) construct may be used.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a distribution member (distribution device 700) uses a configuration in which a ball fired in a right-handed game is distributed to two flow paths. may be used. In this case, one distribution member may distribute the spheres to three or more flow paths, or a plurality of distribution members may be used in combination to distribute the spheres to three or more flow paths. It may be configured to distribute. As a result, the interval at which the ball flows down the flow path that allows the ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 can be further widened.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a distribution member (distribution device 700) that distributes balls evenly to a plurality of flow paths is used. Instead, for example, a distributing member may be provided such that the number of balls flowing down the first flow path 701 and the number of balls flowing down the second flow path 702 are 1:2. Arrangements may be provided for random selection. As a result, the player can be interested in how the ball flows.

In the above-described second embodiment, a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state are provided, and when any of the conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is ended. The time saving state may end when all conditions for ending the time saving state that are set are satisfied. In this case, it is good to use the structure which outputs to the outside so that a player can grasp|ascertain what has already satisfy|filled conditions among several time saving state end conditions.

Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, it is one of the end conditions of the time saving state that the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed multiple times (twice) as the time saving number of times that the time saving state is continued. However, such a configuration may be used to implement the game features described below.

In the above-described third embodiment, when a predetermined condition is established, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is varied, and for the purpose of providing various game characteristics, when the time saving state B is set, further, the time saving state When the number of fluctuations in the normal pattern exceeds 40 times, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shortened to provide an advantageous state to the player, but the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is varied. By doing so, it may be configured to provide a disadvantageous state to the player. In a configuration in which one selection table is selected from the selection tables and the normal pattern variation time to be executed from the selected normal pattern variation time selection table is selected, the variation time of the first special symbol during the time reduction state It may be possible to use a configuration in which a long normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern length fluctuation time) can be selected.

In this case, if the normal pattern length variation time is selected, the normal pattern lottery cannot be executed any more during the time saving state, so the game state advantageous to the player is substantially terminated. By configuring in this way, the player grasps how long the substantial time-saving state (the game state is the time-saving state and the normal pattern length variation time is not selected as the normal pattern variation) continues. It is possible to provide a game that is difficult to do.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation time of the normal pattern (normal pattern), it may be possible to use a configuration that selects the fluctuation time that is preset based on the normal pattern fluctuation time based on the normal pattern fluctuation number in advance, or normally When setting the variation time of the pattern (normal pattern), it is possible to use a configuration that selects the variation time corresponding to the acquired counter value from among a plurality of variation times based on a predetermined counter value. Furthermore, when starting the fluctuation of the normal pattern (normal pattern), a predetermined lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is a predetermined lottery result, as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern (normal pattern), during the time saving state Longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in (for example, 150 seconds) general pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern length fluctuation time) may be selected.

In this way, when a predetermined condition is established, by lengthening the fluctuation time of normal symbols, it is possible to terminate the substantial time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player concentrate and play the game while always having a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is established, the third symbol display device 81 is executed in a configuration in which a normal pattern variation time (normal pattern length variation time) longer than the variation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state is selected. When the normal pattern length variation time is selected as the effect to be performed, it is preferable to turn off the notification of the right-handed game and guide the left-handed game even if it is in the time saving state. In this case, since the special figure 1 variation of the time saving state is still being executed in practice, the time saving state to the third symbol display device 81 until the special figure 1 variation of the time saving state ends It is preferable to execute an effect for notifying that (Renso mode) has ended. As a result, the player can be made to think that the special figure 1 variation during the time saving state is finished and the time saving state is finished.

In addition, as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, in addition to the above-mentioned normal pattern length fluctuation time (150 seconds), it is shorter than that, but the normal pattern fluctuation time (3 seconds) longer than the normal pattern fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds or 50 seconds) may be settable. In this case, when the normal pattern variation time is set, the effect display to make the third pattern display device 81 think that the time saving state has ended is displayed in the same way as when the normal pattern length variation time is set. While displaying and making the player think that the time saving state has ended, the timing when the normal figure fluctuation time ends, or just before the normal figure fluctuation time ends (for example, corresponding to the normal normal figure fluctuation time 3 seconds before), it is preferable to display the production display during the time saving state again. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the state has shifted to the time saving state a plurality of times by using the time saving state once, and to provide the player with an unexpected game.

Furthermore, by combining the two normal figure fluctuation configurations described above, the time saving state end effect that is executed when the set normal figure fluctuation time exceeds the remaining period of the time saving state, and the set normal figure fluctuation time It may be possible to display both the time saving state end suggesting performance executed when is shorter than the remaining period of the time saving state. As a result, even after execution of the time-saving state end presentation, the game can be played enthusiastically while giving an expectation that the game will immediately shift to the time-saving state.

In the above-described first embodiment, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set so that the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 in the normal state (non-time saving state). It is preferable to provide a game stopping means for stopping the game when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in . In this case, as the game stopping means, there is a means for executing a shooting prohibition process in which the ball is not shot even if the operation handle 51 is operated, or a game area (the game board 13) where the ball shot by operating the operation handle 51 is stopped. The ball collection processing to ensure that the ball is collected before it reaches the front surface), the firing control processing to limit the firing strength of the operation handle to a firing strength that is disadvantageous to the player (the firing strength that cannot reach the play area), etc. , even if a ball enters each ball entrance provided in the game area, it is possible to consider a ball entry invalidation process that invalidates all the benefits (the privilege of paying out prize balls, the privilege of executing a lottery).

Further, as the processing for executing the game stopping means, first, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether the current game state is the time saving state. , When it is determined that it is not in the time-saving state, next, it is determined whether the jackpot game is currently in progress. Then, when it is determined that the game is not in the jackpot game, it is determined that the current entry is an illegal entry, and the game stop processing by the above-described game stop means may be set to be executed.

Furthermore, in the above-described game stopping means execution processing, when it is determined that a ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 during a jackpot game, a dedicated privilege effect is executed instead of executing the game stopping means. do it. That is, during the jackpot game, although it is not in the time-saving state, it is in the game state in which the right-handed game is performed. In this case, the game stopping means is not executed, and instead, a dedicated effect for congratulating the player is executed, thereby making the player realize that he or she has had a very rare experience. It is possible to increase the production effect.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the above-described dedicated effect, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the normal symbol variation display in a manner recognizable by the player during the jackpot game, and the electric accessory 640a is displayed. The timing of opening (short opening timing) may be predicted. As a result, the player can complete the jackpot game while gazing at the normal pattern fluctuation display displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

<Other production example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment>
Next, another rendering example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111. FIG. In this production example, the configuration for setting the fluctuation time of the normal design is different from the above-described third embodiment, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern provided according to the game state during the fluctuation time of the normal design It is configured to be set based on the selection table 203aa. Here, with reference to FIG. 109, the contents of the effect executed in the second example of effect will be described.

FIG. 109 shows an example of the display screen of the effect executed in this example 2 of effect, and FIG. 109(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when a long variation is set as the variation time of normal symbols in the time saving state. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the element same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 109(a), on the display screen of this production example 2, a picture simulating a bomb is displayed as an end suggestion display mode Dm10 that serves as an opportunity to reduce the remaining period of the short time period. In the second sub-display area Ds2, the characters "Pinch if the bomb explodes" indicating the content of the end suggestive display mode Dm10 are displayed.

Then, as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, when the fluctuation time longer than the remaining period of the short time period is set, as shown in FIG. In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, the characters "unfortunate end" are displayed, and the remaining time is displayed as "? seconds".

In this way, the actual short period of time (the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 that started fluctuation during the short period of time) does not change, but if it is determined that the fluctuation of the normal pattern (normal pattern) does not end during that short period of time Since the electric accessory 640a does not perform an opening action (long opening) that is advantageous to the player for a short period of time, the state that is advantageous to the player is substantially over.

In this production example 2, the display screen shown in FIG. 109(b) is displayed when a variation time longer than the remaining period of the short time period is set as the variation time of the normal symbol. However, if it is possible to set a longer variation time (for example, 10 seconds) than the normal variation time (3 seconds) as the variation time for normal symbols, and the same display screen is displayed when the variation time is selected. good. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to think that the advantageous period has ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202aa used in the present production example 2 will be described. FIG. 110(a) is a schematic diagram in which the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202aa are defined. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa includes a normal normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa1 that is referred to when the game state is the normal state, and when the game state is time saving A A normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa2 for time saving A to be referred to and an attached figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa3 for time saving B to be referred to when the game state is time saving B are defined, and different depending on each game state A variation pattern selection table is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 110(b), the normal normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa1 is defined so that a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of 4 seconds is always selected, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table for time reduction A 202aa2 and time saving B attached figure variation pattern selection table 202aa3 respectively, as shown in FIG. 110 (c) and FIG. A variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the number of times.

In addition, since it is the same as that of 3rd Embodiment mentioned above about the measurement means of the normal pattern (normal pattern) fluctuation|variation frequency in a time saving state, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the normal symbol variation process 4 executed in the present production example 2 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 4. FIG. This normal symbol variation process 4 is different from the above-described normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) in that the process of setting the variation time (S914, S915) is changed, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. When the normal symbol variation process 4 is executed and it is determined that it is not in the time saving in the process of S912 (S912: No), or when the process of S913 is finished, the variation time is set based on the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202aa. and terminate this process.

According to the present effect example 2 explained above, the period in which the player is advantageous (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is open for a long time) in a short period of time can be varied according to the set normal symbol fluctuation time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player always pay attention to how long the advantageous period lasts.

In addition, based on the general pattern winning information command output from the main control device 110, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern that is reserved and stored is determined in advance, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is based on the determination result. may be set. In this case, for example, if there is no normal pattern fluctuation of the fluctuation time that exceeds the remaining time period in the normal pattern prior determination information, the end suggestion display mode Dm10 may not be displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide a period during which the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, depending on the presence or absence of reserved storage of special figure 2, the effect display mode may be changed. In this case, it is preferable to display the end suggestion display mode Dm10 only in the state where there is no pending memory of the special figure 2. As a result, the player can be made to play a game with a sense of danger, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Other examples using the configuration of each embodiment described above>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) lottery (symbol winning), and when the ball passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) ( Although an example of using a pachinko machine 10 (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a jackpot game is executed for V winning) has been described, only the above-described symbol winning is adopted in the configuration of each embodiment described above. You may use it for the game machine (so-called type 1 type). Next, a description will be given of a game machine in which the configuration of each embodiment described above is used as one type.

In the gaming machine used in other examples, a jackpot game is executed when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols (first special pattern, second special pattern), and a predetermined condition is established depending on the type of the jackpot won. Until (until the special symbols fluctuate 5 times), the probability of winning a jackpot by lottery of special symbols is set to a higher probability than the normal state. It is a seed probability variable type), and the jackpot winning based on the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot winning based on the first special symbol game) is configured to be easily provided.

Furthermore, when the game state shifts to the variable probability state, a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol in the same manner as in the above-described embodiments. make it easier. And, in the state of having both the reserved memory of the first special symbol and the reserved memory of the second special symbol, the variation (lottery) based on the reserved memory of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. There is (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol in a state where the long-time variation of the first special symbol is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game during the predetermined period (during the first special symbol variation in the variable probability state). In addition, when such a configuration is used, by performing a game (for example, a right-handed game) aiming at a predetermined part of the game area, the first ball entering means that serves as an opportunity to acquire the reserved memory of the first special symbol (first ball entrance 64) and second ball entrance means (second ball entrance 640) that triggers the acquisition of the reserved memory of the second special symbol. Means should be provided. Further, it is preferable that the second ball-entering means makes it more difficult for the ball to enter than the first ball-entering means.

As a result, in the probability variation state, a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the probability variation state continues for a predetermined period (period until the number of variations of the special symbol ends 5 times) During the period, A game (disadvantageous game) in which the variation of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery of the second special symbol (without the ball entering the second ball entering means), or the first special A variation pattern with a long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the symbol, and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed during a predetermined period in which the probability variation state continues (period until the number of variations of the special symbol is completed 5 times). (A ball enters the second ball entering means), and either a game (advantageous game) in which the variation of the second special symbol is executed is executed.

In this way, the variable probability state that is advantageous to the player and the variable probability state that is disadvantageous to the player are executed by the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the variable probability state, so that the variation of the special symbol that is executed during the variable probability state can be made to watch the player. Further, as in the above-described embodiments, even when a small winning is made in the first special symbol, the game of acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be continued.

It should be noted that, in the other examples described above, as a gaming machine of type 1 probability variation type, the probability variation state uses a configuration that ends when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, but other configurations may be used, For example, a configuration for continuing the variable probability state until the next big hit is won, and a lottery as to whether or not to end the variable probability state is performed each time a variation (lottery) of special symbols is executed, and based on the lottery result. You may use the structure which terminates a probability change state.

Also, in the other examples described above, the variation based on the reserved storage of the special figure 2 (lottery) is preferentially executed than the variation based on the reserved storage of the special figure 2 (lottery) However, without being limited to this, regardless of the special figure 1 and special figure 2, it may be possible to use a configuration that executes the variation (lottery) of the special symbols in the order of acquiring the reserved memory (the order of winning). Furthermore, the continuous number of times (upper limit number of times) to which the variable probability state is provided may be set in advance, and when the upper limit number of times is reached, the variable probability state may not be provided after the jackpot is completed.

Next, in the above-described first embodiment, during the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed during the time saving state, by acquiring the pending memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2), Although the structure in which the time saving state is given again after the jackpot game based on the reservation memory is used, the upper limit (for example, 5 times) may be set to the number of times the time saving state is given continuously. .

In this case, depending on the number of jackpot rights acquired during one time-saving state (the number of reserved memories in special figure 2), the number of jackpots executed until the number of consecutive times of time-saving state reaches the upper limit. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to obtain a larger number of reserved memories of the special figure 2. - 特許庁

It should be noted that, in the above-described first embodiment, it is configured so that the time saving state is always given after the end of the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2, but the jackpot game based on the reserved memory of the special figure 2 It may be configured such that a jackpot type to which the time saving state is not given after the end is also selected. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the time-saving state is given when the jackpot is continuously executed by continuously consuming the reserved memory of the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

That is, for example, in the state of 4 reserved memories of special figure 2, if the jackpot game based on the reserved memory is 4 times in a row and there is time saving, at the time of digesting 4 reserved memories of special figure 2, time saving While the variation of the next special symbol is executed in a state where the number of times of continuous imparting of the state is 4, it is based on the last digested reservation memory among the jackpot games based on the reservation memory of the special figure 2. If the jackpot has time saving and the other has no time saving, when the 4 reserved memories of special figure 2 are consumed, the number of times of continuous giving of the time saving state becomes 1 time.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the number of times of continuous provision of the time saving state has reached the upper limit, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, depending on the jackpot type of the reserved memory of the acquired special figure 2, the maximum number of jackpots when the number of times of continuous giving in the time saving state reaches the upper limit can be varied, so that the game with unexpectedness is provided to the player. be able to.

In addition, as a method for measuring the number of times of continuous granting of time saving state, it may be a method of measuring the number of times that time saving is set for consecutive jackpots, or measuring the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 fluctuation executed during time saving state It can be a method to When the latter measurement method is used in the first embodiment described above, when the number of times of continuous application of the time saving state reaches the upper limit (5 times) in one continuous mode, a maximum of 25 jackpots (especially If the number of pending memories in Figure 2 is the upper limit (4) each time, and the variation result of Special Figure 1 is a jackpot every time), a minimum of 5 jackpots (the number of pending memories of Special Figure 2 is 1 each time, special If the variation result in FIG. 1 is out every time) is provided. In this way, when the upper limit is set for the number of continuous grants of the time-saving state, the number of jackpots executed during one continuous mode can be varied, so that the player can It is possible to play the game voluntarily.

In addition, in a right-handed state (for example, a time-saving state or a variable probability state) that is advantageous to the player, an advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) that is advantageous to the player among the special symbols, and a disadvantageous special symbol The special symbol (first special symbol) is configured to be variable (lottery), and during the right-handed state, the second special symbol is more likely to establish the variation execution condition than the first special symbol. In the gaming machine, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating by the discriminating means for discriminating the type of the special symbol to be varied during the right-handed game, the display means (third symbol display device 81) displays the 2. Effect display is executed to variably display the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, and when the determination means determines that the first special symbol is fluctuating, the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed. Rather than the variable display of the identification information for the third symbol, the guidance display (e.g., "accumulate the suspension of the special symbol 2") that encourages acquisition of the second special symbol's reserved memory during the variable period is emphasized. It may be configured to be displayed on the display device 81 .

Thus, in a specific game state, by varying the display mode (particularly, the variable display mode of the special symbols) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of the special symbol to be executed, the currently set An appropriate game method can be notified to the player based on the current game state and the current game content. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, a discrimination means for discriminating the variation time of the first special symbol executed during the right-handed game is provided, and the variation time of the first special symbol being executed by the discrimination means is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). When it is determined that the above is the case, it is preferable to configure the guidance display described above to be displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the contents of the guide display, and the game contents of the game being executed can be corrected. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to shortening of the period in which the guide display is displayed.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state, the first opening period is 3 seconds, the closing period is 5 seconds, and the second opening period is 3 seconds. ) is set, and when the opening scenario corresponding to the set opening pattern ends, or when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the opening operation of the electric role object 640a, the electric role Although it is configured so that a condition (termination condition) for terminating the opening operation of the object 640a is established, a different opening pattern and termination condition are set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, and each embodiment described above and the termination condition are set. may constitute gaming machines having different game characteristics.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the electric accessory 640a is released during the time saving state (when winning the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state), the number of balls entering the second ball entrance 640 is By restricting the number to one, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving excessive benefits. However, by using such a configuration, a privilege given to the player when winning the normal pattern lottery during the time saving state (a privilege that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640). is always constant, and there is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, as an opening pattern (long opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a executed during the time saving state, the interval at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a (the ball is released by the distribution member 700 An opening pattern using an opening scenario in which opening of 0.2 seconds is repeated five times at intervals of 1.2 seconds, which is the interval to be distributed), is set, and the opening scenario has ended as a condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which the end condition is set when four balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.

By configuring in this way, when the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is opened in the long opening pattern coincides with the timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed once. , it is possible to enter a maximum of four balls into the second ball entrance 640 . Therefore, the privilege given to the player when winning the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state (the privilege that the ball is easier to enter the second ball entrance 640) The timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a can be varied to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, the opening interval of the electric accessory 640a is set so that when the right-handed game is continuously executed (when the game in which 100 balls are fired per minute is executed), the electric accessory 640a Since it is set to 1.2 seconds, which is the same as the timing of reaching the can do.

Further, as explained using the above-described first embodiment, in the right side area of the game board 13, there are distribution members 700 for alternately distributing game balls, and the balls distributed by the distribution member 700 flow down. Since it is configured so that the ball reaches the electric accessory 640 through the straightening means (the curved path 701a and the direct passage that does not reduce the flow speed of the ball) for making the interval constant, right-handed games can be played. It is possible to further improve the accuracy of the interval at which the shot ball reaches the electric accessory 640a in the case of continuous execution.

In addition, when such a configuration is used, it may be configured to execute suggestion notification for suggesting the release timing of the electric accessory 640a to the player. By executing this suggestive notification, it is possible to make the player play the game aiming at the timing at which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means capable of determining the operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is performed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. In addition, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used, and a display applying the organic electroluminescence (EL) phenomenon that emits light when a voltage is applied to a layered structure using a certain kind of organic compound. The device (organic EL display) and the surface of various three-dimensional objects (characters, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 are used as screens, and after identifying the position of the three-dimensional surface (protrusion, burial relationship), images are displayed using a projector. An illuminating display device (project mapping) may also be used.

When the project mapping described above is used as the display means, projection of video data is performed based on the data of the three-dimensional surface of the movable role provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the position data of the movable role at the time of irradiation. By configuring so as to determine the position and the content, it is possible to execute display freely and enhance the presentation effect. In addition, considering the case where an abnormality occurs in the movable accessory that can be the screen, it is determined whether the movable condition of the movable accessory is normal, and if the determination result is not normal, the non-movable Abnormal time control should be executed so that the image data is projected on the location as a screen. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player cannot grasp the display contents displayed on the display means due to the abnormality of the movable accessory.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the normal game state. However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (1 type and 2 types of configuration, definite change in special 1 fluctuation period)
a first acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by a first determination means; and said first identification information for indicating a specific said first determination result. a first privilege granting means for granting a first privilege to the player when the display is stopped; a second acquisition means for acquiring second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition; a storage means for storing the obtained second information; and a second determination for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the second information stored in the storage means. 2 determination means and can be set by switching between a first state in which the establishment of the second acquisition condition is restricted and a second state in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be established than in the first state. and a priority means for executing the second determination corresponding to the second information stored in the storage means with priority over the first determination. , wherein the first determination is executed before the second determination is executed when the first state is switched to the second state. A1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of a starting port provided in a game board is changed from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls are easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery is executed a predetermined number of times by a game ball entering a starting port in a state that is likely to be changed to the second state, and until the result of the lottery for the predetermined number of times is displayed. A gaming machine in which settings are continuously set has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the probability that the determination that the lottery is advantageous to the player is executed in a state where the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player is early. I had the problem of getting bored.

According to the gaming machine A1, even when a special state occurs in which the second acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied, dynamic display of the first identification information is executed, and the second determination is performed during the dynamic display period. Since the execution is regulated, at the start of the special state, the first judgment that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second judgment is executed, and after that, the second judgment that is advantageous to the player is executed. Since the priority means executes the second determination prior to the first determination with respect to the second information stored in the storage means, the second determination advantageous to the player is continuously performed. By switching to a period in which the game is more likely to be executed, the player's interest is improved, and the problem of the player becoming bored with the game early can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A1, a first ball-entering means that triggers establishment of the first acquisition condition when a game ball enters, and a game ball-entry triggers establishment of the second acquisition condition. A second ball-entering means, a variable member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter the second ball-entering means and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and a game ball passing through a predetermined passage area. Detecting means capable of detecting whether or not a game ball is detected, lottery means for executing a lottery based on the detection of a game ball by the detecting means, and lottery information for indicating the lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed. A lottery information dynamic display means, and when the lottery information for indicating a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed, the variable member is switched to the closed state or the open state according to a variable pattern set according to a predetermined rule. and variable control means for varying the lottery means, wherein the lottery means is configured to be able to execute the lottery even during a period in which the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine A2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the special state is set and the lottery is performed by passing the game ball through the passage area even during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed. Since it is possible to satisfy the second acquisition condition by making the game ball enter the second ball entering means, the passage area is set as much as possible even during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that the player can play the game so as to pass the game ball through.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a variable prize winning means for changing between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter, and a specific area through which a game ball having entered the variable prize means can pass. , when the game ball passes through the specific area, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second determination means determine that it is a specific second determination result a variable game executing means for changing the variable ball-entering means from the difficult-to-enter state to the possible state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, by executing the second determination, it is possible to shift to a game in which the game ball is passed through the specific area, and the player can There is an effect that a game with variety can be provided.

In either game machine A2 or A3, the variable pattern that is varied by the variable control means is variably set corresponding to the period during which the special state is set. Game machine A4.

According to the game machine A4, since the variable pattern is varied corresponding to the period during which the special state is set, there is an effect that the variable pattern can be executed in accordance with the period during which the special state is set.

In any one of game machines A2 to A4, a first storage means for storing the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the first identification dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means and a first dynamic display period setting means for determining a dynamic display period of information, wherein the first dynamic display period setting means is set in the case where the second state is set by the state setting means As a dynamic display period of the first identification information, at least a first dynamic display period shorter than a dynamic display period during which the lottery information is dynamically displayed by the lottery information dynamic display means, and the lottery information A gaming machine A5 characterized by being able to set a second dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period for dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the length of the dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means causes the second input state to be set as the second state. It is possible to set an advantageous state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means and a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game so that the second state is advantageous.

The game machine A5 has display means capable of displaying predetermined information, and display control means for causing the display means to display state information for indicating the state of the game set by the state setting means, and the display The control means is characterized in that, when the second dynamic display period is set by the first dynamic display period setting means, the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed. Game machine A6 to play.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, a game ball is entered into the second ball-entering means as the dynamic display period of the first identification information even though the second state is set. When the second dynamic display period, which is difficult to display, is set, the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 has a game regulating means capable of regulating the game played by the player based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied while the first state is set. A game machine A7 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the player's Since it is possible to regulate the game, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the illegal establishment of the second acquisition condition.

A gaming machine A8 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A7, the game regulation means regulates the shooting of game balls.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, since the shooting of the game balls is restricted by the game restricting means, there is an effect that illegality can be effectively suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the first ball entering means comprises a first channel in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entering means and a game ball in which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means. The first ball entry means arranged in the second flow path is arranged in the second flow path, and the game ball enters the ball entrance arranged in the second flow path. The game ball is brought into a state in which it is possible to enter the game ball, and the game ball enters a first ball entering means arranged in the second flow path, thereby making it difficult to enter the game ball. Gaming machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, by entering the game ball into the ball entrance, the second state is set and the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance means. Even when the game ball is caused to flow down the second flow path to make the ball enter, the game ball enters the ball entry port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means. There is an effect that the determination can be easily executed and configured.

In the gaming machine A9, a holding means capable of holding a game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the ball entrance, and a holding release means for releasing the holding by the holding means based on the establishment of a release condition. and a gaming machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, there is an effect that the timing of entering the game ball into the first ball entering means can be controlled according to the release condition.

In the gaming machine A10, the gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the cancellation condition is canceled when the first privilege is granted by the first privilege granting means.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, since the release condition is met at the timing when the first privilege is granted, the first acquisition condition is likely to be met after the first privilege is granted. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature B group> (Special 1 prize regulation at normal time)
A first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path in which a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter. a second ball-entering means arranged in the second flow path and capable of entering a game ball; and a game ball entering the first ball-entering means or the second ball-entering means. Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that the ball has been hit; determination means for executing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means; A gaming machine comprising: dynamic display means for displaying; and privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed , setting a special state in which the player is in a more advantageous state than executing the game with the game balls flowing down the first flow path by executing the game with the game balls flowing down the second flow path. and a state setting means capable of performing the first input when the game is played by causing the game ball to flow down the second flow path in a state in which the special state is not set by the state setting means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising a regulation means for making it more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the ball means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of a starting port provided in a game board is changed from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls are easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery is executed a predetermined number of times by a game ball entering a starting port in a state that is likely to be changed to the second state, and until the result of the lottery for the predetermined number of times is displayed. A gaming machine in which settings are continuously set has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the probability that the determination that the lottery is advantageous to the player is executed in a state where the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player is early. I had the problem of getting bored. In addition, if a game is played by changing the flow route of the game ball in order to give variety to the game, the game ball is made to flow down a route different from the assumed flow route, thereby illegally profiting the player. was given.

According to the gaming machine B1, when the special state is set, the second flow path is made to flow down to play the game, thereby changing the game, while the special state is set. If not, the game ball is regulated so that it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the first ball entering means. By inevitably urging the player to do so, there is an effect that problems such as dishonesty can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B1, at least a third flow path through which game balls can flow down and a fourth flow path through which game balls that have flowed down the third flow path are difficult to flow are formed in the second flow path. and has a distribution means capable of distributing the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path to the third flow path and the fourth flow path, and the second ball entering the fourth flow path. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the means are arranged.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, among the game balls that have flowed down to the second flow path, the game balls distributed to the third flow path can enter the second ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of game balls that can enter the second ball entering means can be reduced more than the first ball entering means.

In the gaming machine B2, a third ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter is arranged in the third flow path, and when the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the Advantage determination means for executing an advantage determination that is more advantageous to the player than the determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means and based on the information acquired by the game ball entering the third ball entry means. and variable control means for changing a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball entering means to a state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the third ball entering means by setting the special state. Game machine B3 to play.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, when the special state is reached, the game ball can be easily entered into the third ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to prompt the player to play a game.

In the game machine B2 or B3, the game machine B4 is characterized in that the distributing means alternately distributes the game balls to the third channel and the fourth channel.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2 or B3, by alternately distributing, the game balls that have flowed down to the second flow path can be made to flow down by half, effectively the second ball entering means There is an effect that it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that enter the ball.

In the game machines B1 to B4, the state is switched between a holding means capable of holding the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path or the second flow path and a state in which the game ball held by the holding means flows downstream. A switching means, an opening into which the game ball that has flowed down by being switched to the flowing state by the switching means can enter, and the game ball entering the opening causes the second ball entry. A game machine B5 characterized by having a variable means for setting the means to a state in which a game ball can enter.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the holding means and the switching means restrict the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means, so that the game ball is pushed into the second ball entry means at an unintended timing. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball enters the second ball entering means.

In the gaming machine B5, the switching means switches to a state in which the game ball can be held after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after switching to the flowing state.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, it is possible to define the period during which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means. can be more regulated.

In the game machine B5 or B6, the second ball entry means is changed by the variable means to a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, based on the entry of the game ball. Game machine B7 to play.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5 or B6, even during the period in which the switching means is switched to the sulfurizing state, the game ball enters the second ball entering means. In this case, since the second ball entering means is changed to a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from entering the second ball entering means in succession. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player.

In any one of the game machines B5 to B7, a first position provided in an area where the game ball held by the holding means can flow down and can guide the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path; A variable guide means that can be varied to a second position where it is difficult to guide the flow path, and a guide member variable control that variably controls the variable guide means to the first position and the second position at predetermined intervals. A game machine B8 characterized by comprising means, wherein the opening is disposed in a region where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the timing at which the game ball held by the holding means can flow downstream by the switching means and the variable guiding means can be set to the first position Since it is possible to enter the game ball into the opening only when the timing to be varied satisfies a predetermined condition, the player is motivated to play the game while being aware of the timing of the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B8, when the special state is set by the state setting means, the identification information is dynamically displayed so that the remaining period of the special state is shortened. A gaming machine B9 characterized by having a variable means for changing the

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B8, the dynamic display of the identification information shortens the remaining period of the special state, so the dynamic display of the identification information to the player. There is an effect that the period can be aroused and the amusement of the game can be improved. Note that the longer the dynamic display period is executed, the longer the special state advantageous to the player becomes, so the player can expect a long dynamic display period.

<Characteristic group C> (control to keep one game running)
A first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path in which a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter. A first ball-entering means arranged, a second ball-entering means arranged in the second flow path and capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball entering the first ball-entering means or the second ball-entering means Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that the ball has entered; determination means for executing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means; In a gaming machine comprising: dynamic display means for displaying; and privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed, wherein: 2 a variable means for changing between a first state in which a game ball can be entered into the ball-entering means and a second state in which the ball-entering is more difficult than in the first state; Variable execution means for changing to a first state based on the establishment of a variable condition, and execution of a game by causing a game ball to flow down from the first flow path to the second flow path based on the establishment of a specific condition. a special state setting means for setting a special state in which a privilege game that is advantageous to a player is easily executed by doing so; and a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed after the privilege game is executed. and a variable condition determining means for determining whether the variable condition is established when the privilege game is executed. Gaming machine C1 to play.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game is executed, and a high-probability state is set in which the probability of lottery after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game, so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to confirm whether the lottery is actually drawn in a high probability state before playing the game, and there is a problem that interest tends to decrease.

According to the gaming machine C1, when the privilege game is executed, it is determined whether or not the variable condition for determining whether the variable means is changed to the first state is satisfied. By changing the variable means to the first state, the identification information can be easily dynamically displayed, the special state can be easily canceled, and the identification information can be difficult to be dynamically displayed unless the variable means is changed, There is an effect that the special state can be easily set continuously, and the interest can be improved depending on whether or not the variable condition is satisfied when the privilege game is executed.

The gaming machine C1 has type determination means for determining the type of the privilege game when the privilege game is executed, and the variable condition determination means determines the type of the privilege game determined by the type determination means. A game machine C2 characterized in that it determines whether the variable condition is established based on the above.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, establishment of the variable condition is determined based on the type of the privilege game to be executed. A ratio can also be set, and there is an effect that stable game contents can be set.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the privilege granting means executes the privilege game as one of the privileges, and the type determination means determines the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege granting means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the special state is set based on the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege granting means.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, the rate at which the special state is set can be varied by setting the type of the privilege game, and the game machine can be designed by easily adjusting the spectacle. has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the second passage is provided with a third ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, The information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball, and the determination means is based on the information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the third entry means. It has control means that can be changed between a state of restricting the game ball from entering the third ball entering means and a state of allowing the entering of the game ball. , The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the regulation means is configured to be easily changed to the state of allowing the ball entry by setting the special state.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a game ball is likely to be entered into the third ball entering means for executing an advantageous determination that is advantageous to the player when a special state occurs. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prompt the game ball to flow down to the second flow path and play the game.

In the gaming machine C4, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass; and a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game when the game ball passes through the specific area, and when it is determined that the advantageous determination results in a specific result, the variable ball entry means is in a closed state. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being variable to an open state.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the privilege game is executed by passing the game ball through the specific area, so that the player can be interested in the ball flow. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C5, a first storage means capable of storing the information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means; determination condition determination means for determining the information for which determination is performed by the determination means based on the information obtained, and the type determination means stores the information in the storage means at least during the privilege game. A first type corresponding to a first privilege game which is easy to store and a second type corresponding to a second privilege game which is harder to store the information in the storage means than the first type are determined. Characterized game machine C6.

According to the gaming machine C6, according to the type determined by the type determining means, it is possible to execute a privilege game in which information is easily stored in the first storage means during the privilege game and a privilege game in which information is difficult to be stored. Thereby, when the special state is given after the end of the privilege game, it is possible to set the state in which the identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means is dynamically displayed and the state in which it is not displayed. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to dynamically display the identification information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means during the special state, and it is possible to diversify the games executed during the special state.

In the gaming machine C6, the special state setting means includes a first special state in which, during the special state, identification information based on a game ball entering the first ball entering means is dynamically displayed; 2. A second special state is set in which identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball-entering means is dynamically displayed, and the second special state is more active than the first special state. The game machine C7 is characterized in that a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is likely to be executed.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the degree of advantage provided to the player can be varied depending on the type of identification information dynamically displayed during the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

<Feature D group> (Consecutive chan mode end effect)
A first determination based on a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. and determining means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the identification information; a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entering means can be changed to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied; Dynamic display of the identification information is executed when the state is set, and cancellation means for canceling the special state based on the end of the dynamic display period, and the special state is set. dynamic display of the identification information is started, and based on the remaining dynamic display period, a performance execution means for executing a performance based on the information that determines that the specific condition is established. Characterized gaming machine D1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game is executed, and a high-probability state is set in which the probability of lottery after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game, so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, patterns for informing the player of the lottery result are variably displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like, and thereafter, the pattern indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result. If it is a hit, it is known that a winning game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous due to the repetition of the variable display of symbols based on the lottery results, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

According to the game machine D1, since the remaining period of the special state changes with the lapse of the dynamic display period of the identification information executed when the special state is set, it is specified by the effect executed by the effect executing means. There is an effect that it is possible to recognize the establishment of the condition and the remaining period of the special state, and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

The gaming machine D1 has detecting means for detecting that a game ball has passed through a passage area, and determination means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied when the detecting means detects the passage of the game ball. The game machine D2 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes a effect for indicating the result of the determination based on the execution of the determination by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, even when the identification information is displayed in the special state, it is determined whether the specific condition is established by causing the game ball to pass through the passage area. , there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the game machine D3 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes a specific effect based on the fact that the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information is equal to or less than a predetermined period. .

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, there is an effect that it is possible to determine that the remaining period of the special state has become equal to or shorter than the predetermined period by executing the specific effect. .

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the second determination is executed by the determining means out of the information acquired by the acquiring means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of the information before the identification information is displayed, and the effect execution means stores the information in the storage means when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information is equal to or less than the predetermined period. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the specific performance is not executed on the condition that it is stored.

According to the game machine D4, even if the special state ends due to the information being stored in the storage means in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the information is stored in the storage means. Since this is a state in which an advantageous determination is likely to be made, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress unnecessary anxiety given to the player by executing the specific effect.

Second dynamic display means for stopping display after dynamic display of result information for indicating the determination result by the determination means for a predetermined period in any one of game machines D2 to D4, and the second dynamic display means. and a period determining means for determining a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the point in time when the result information is stop-displayed, and the effect executing means determines that the result of determination by the period determining means satisfies a predetermined period condition. is satisfied, the stop display mode of the result information is switched to a stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information satisfies the period condition, the stop display mode can be switched. It is possible to provide an unexpected performance to a person, and enhance the performance effect.

In the gaming machine D5, the period condition is satisfied when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the point of stop display of the result information by the second dynamic display means is within a predetermined period. A gaming machine D6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, it is possible to suppress the problem that the result information and the identification information are stopped and displayed at short intervals, making it difficult for the player to grasp the display contents. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

<Feature E group> (Change normal figure fluctuation period in time saving state)
A first determination based on a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. and determining means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a game ball; variable means for changing to a second state; state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the variable means can change to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied; and state setting for the special state. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed when the special state is set by means, and releasing means for releasing the special state based on the expiration of the dynamic display period; and the variable means. A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether to change from the first state to the second state, and lottery information dynamic display for dynamically displaying the lottery information for indicating the lottery result by the lottery means. means, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed, and dynamic display periods in which a plurality of the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determination means are set storage means for storing a plurality of display period groups; selection means for selecting the type of the special state set by the state setting means; A gaming machine E1, wherein the dynamic display period determining means has dynamic display period group setting means for setting the dynamic display period group for determining the dynamic display period.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game is executed, and a high-probability state is set in which the probability of lottery after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game, so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, patterns for informing the player of the lottery result are variably displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like, and thereafter, the pattern indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result. If it is a hit, it is known that a winning game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous due to the repetition of the variable display of symbols based on the lottery results, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

According to the game machine E1, if the lottery information with a short dynamic display period is determined, the lottery can be executed during the special state period, and the determined dynamic display period group can improve the interest of the game. , there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

In the gaming machine E1, acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means are stored. and a storage means, wherein the determination means executes the first determination or the second determination based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the information acquired by the acquisition means can be stored in the storage means. It is possible to play a game by pressing the button, and to improve the efficiency of the game.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the determination means performs the first determination or the second determination during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed even when the information is stored in the storage means. A gaming machine E3 characterized by waiting for execution.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, while the identification information is dynamically displayed, execution of determination based on the information stored in the storage means is on standby. Multiple determinations based on the information stored in the means are not executed at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3 has detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through a passage area through which the game ball can pass, and the lottery means detects the passage of the game ball by the detection means. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the lottery is executed based on the fact that the game machine E4 has been selected.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the passage area, the lottery is executed by the lottery means. There is an effect that the player can be motivated to play a game using the game balls.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E4, the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is a short dynamic display period set so that a short dynamic display period can be easily determined as the dynamic display period. A gaming machine characterized in that at least a display period group and a long dynamic display period group in which the short dynamic display period is more difficult to determine than the short dynamic display period group are set. E5.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the length of the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means can be changed. can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the number of times the lottery is executed by the lottery means during a special state that is advantageous to the player, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines E2 to E5, the dynamic display period determining means is based on the number of information acquired based on the second ball entering means stored in the storage means. A gaming machine E6, characterized in that one dynamic display period is determined from the determined dynamic display period group by using the above-described dynamic display period group.

According to the gaming machine E6, the dynamic display period is determined based on the number of pieces of information acquired based on the second ball entering means in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines E2 to E5. Therefore, it is possible to associate the game in which the game ball is entered into the second ball entering means and the number of lotteries executed by the lottery means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machines E1 to E6 have notification means for notifying that the special state is set, and the notification means dynamically display the lottery information determined by the dynamic display period determination means. A gaming machine E7 characterized in that the notification is made only when the period is shorter than the remaining period of the special state set by the state setting means.

According to the gaming machine E7, only when the dynamic display of the lottery information ends in a state in which the special state is set, the notification means reports that the special state is present. Therefore, even during the special state, by informing the player of the special state during the remaining period of the special state in which the variable means is not changed from the first state to the second state, the player is distrusted. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a feeling.

<Feature F group> (Special 1 performance during time saving)
A first determination based on a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. and determining means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a specific determination result; and a privilege game execution means for changing a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means to a second state in which a game ball can be entered. lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition; lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating the lottery result by the lottery means; and a specific lottery result. state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the variable means can change the lottery information to the second state when the lottery information for indicating that the lottery information is stopped is displayed; a cancellation means for canceling the special state based on the fact that dynamic display of the identification information is executed when the state is set and the dynamic display period ends; and the special state is not set. an effect execution means for executing an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information, and executing an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information based on the setting of the special state; and the effect executing means specifies the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information from the state in which the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is executed when the special state is set. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it is switched and executed based on the establishment of a condition.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game is executed, and a high-probability state is set in which the probability of lottery after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game, so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, patterns for informing the player of the lottery result are variably displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like, and thereafter, the pattern indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result. If it is a hit, it is known that a winning game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965). However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous due to the repetition of the variable display of symbols based on the lottery results, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine F1, when the special state occurs, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means, so the specific lottery result that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entering means. Since it is possible to switch to an effect corresponding to whether or not it becomes, it is possible to provide the player with an effect corresponding to different information between the special state and the non-special state, so that the game can be changed, and the player can be early. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of.

In the gaming machine F1, information acquiring means for acquiring information determined by the determining means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the information acquiring means and storage means for storing the acquired information.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, even when many game balls enter the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, the information acquired in the storage means. is memorized, there is an effect that the player can be given many opportunities to be judged.

In the game machine F2, the determination means is based on the information acquired based on the fact that the determination condition is satisfied and the ball is entered into the second ball entry means stored in the storage means. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the determination is executed with priority over the information acquired based on the first ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, when there is a plurality of information acquired based on the second ball entering means, the plurality of information can be continuously determined. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute determinations that are advantageous to the player, and the effect is that the player's desire to play can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the specific condition is that when the special state is set, the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information whose dynamic display is started is equal to or shorter than a predetermined period. A game machine F4 characterized in that at least one of establishment conditions is set to be true.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information executed when the special state is released before the special state is released. , and when it is released smoothly, there is an effect that the effect can be switched.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the specific condition includes the identification information whose dynamic display is started when the special state is set, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, which is stopped and displayed. A game machine F5 characterized in that at least one of the conditions is set to be set so as to be performed.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the identification information dynamically displayed is statically displayed with the identification information indicating that it is a specific determination result, At first, a performance corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is performed to inform the player whether the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entering means, and then a specific judgment result is obtained. can also be notified by an effect, so there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an effect that effectively utilizes the dynamic display period of the identification information.

<Characteristic G group> (Game support)
A ball entry means having an opening into which a game ball can enter, an open state in which a game ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means, and a closed state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. A variable member that can be varied, a determination means for executing determination based on the passage of a game ball, and when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, the variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state. and a variable control means for varying in a specific variable pattern, wherein the variable pattern is the open state after a first open pattern that is the open state, followed by a closed pattern that is the closed state for a predetermined period. A gaming machine G1 characterized by comprising at least a second opening pattern.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a passage area through which game balls can pass, and when a game ball passes through the passage area, a predetermined first lottery is executed, and the result of the lottery is a win. A proposal has been made to change a variable member so that a ball can easily enter a specific ball entrance. In such a game machine, when a ball enters a specific ball entrance, a second lottery different from a predetermined lottery is executed, and a pattern for informing the player of the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. , etc., and then stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating the lottery result to notify the lottery result, and if the lottery result is a win, a winning game is known (for example, 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, since the variable display of symbols based on the result of the second lottery is displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that the player overlooks the result of the first lottery. rice field.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the first opening pattern and the second opening pattern are configured, the execution of the first opening pattern will prompt the player to notice that the variable member is being variably controlled. On the other hand, the game ball can enter the ball entering means during the second open pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to support the game for a player who does not understand the game contents.

In the game machine G1, a closing determining means for determining that the closing pattern among the variable patterns has been executed, and a predetermined first and a notification executing means for executing notification.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the first notification is executed by the notification execution means based on the completion of the execution of the first opening pattern and the execution of the closing pattern. The player can easily grasp that the variable control of the variable member is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to support the game for a player who does not understand the game contents.

The game machine G2 has a game area in which the variable member is provided, and operation means for shooting game balls into the game area, and the period set as the closed pattern among the variable patterns is The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the period is set longer than the period until the ball shot by the operating means reaches the variable member.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, the period set as the closed pattern is set longer than the period until the ball shot by the operation means reaches the variable member. Even if the player who recognizes that the variable control of the variable member is being executed by the first notification by the notification execution means starts the operation of the operation means, the ball entering means is executed while the second opening pattern is being executed. It is possible to enter the ball in. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to support the game for a player who does not understand the game contents.

Any one of the game machines G1 to G3 has end condition determination means for determining that a termination condition for ending the operation of varying the variable member by the variable control means is established, and the end condition determination means The game machine G4 is characterized in that it is determined that the termination condition is established when the predetermined variable pattern is executed or when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the end condition is established when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entering means, so that the predetermined number of balls enter the first open pattern. By entering the ball into the ball entering means, it is possible to end the variable control of the variable member by the variable control means without executing the closing pattern. As a result, the variable control period for one time can be shortened, so that the player can be motivated to play the game. In addition, even if the closing pattern is set for a long period of time, the end condition of the variable control can be established during the period in which the first variable pattern is being executed. , there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction caused by the execution of the long-term closed pattern.

In the game machine G4, among the variable patterns, the period set as the first open pattern is set longer than the period until the predetermined number of balls shot by the operating means reach the variable member. The game machine G5 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, a predetermined number of balls can be entered into the ball-entering means during the period in which the first opening pattern is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction caused by the execution of the closed pattern for a long period of time for the player who is playing the normal game.

In gaming machines G1 to G5, the notification executing means outputs a predetermined second notification when a ball enters the ball entering means while the second open pattern is being executed among the variable patterns. A game machine G6 characterized by executing

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when a ball enters the ball entering means while the second opening pattern is being executed, the second notification is executed. Therefore, the player can correct the operation method of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to support the game for a player who does not understand the game contents.

A game machine G7 characterized in that among the game machines G1 to G6, the period set as the first opening pattern among the variable patterns is shorter than the period set as the second opening pattern.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G1 to G6, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entering means during the period in which the variable pattern is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to support the game for a player who does not understand the game contents.

<Characteristic H group> (Production just before the end of the time-saving game)
A first determination based on a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. and determining means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a specific determination result; A lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition, and lottery information for dynamically displaying the lottery information for indicating the lottery result by the lottery means in a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means. a display means, a variable member that changes from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means to a second state in which a game ball can be entered, and a specific result of the lottery. state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the variable member can be changed to the second state when the lottery information for indicating that the special a canceling means for canceling the special state when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times when the state is set and the period of dynamic display for the predetermined number of times ends; When the dynamic display of the lottery information is started during the state, the performance is executed based on the information corresponding to the period during which the special state is set as the timing at which the lottery information is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine H1 characterized by having means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game is executed, and a high-probability state is set in which the probability of lottery after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game, so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, patterns for informing the player of the lottery result are variably displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like, and thereafter, the pattern indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result. If it is a hit, it is known that a winning game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous due to the repetition of the variable display of symbols based on the lottery results, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

According to the game machine H1, the effect is executed based on the state set to the stop display timing of the lottery information whose dynamic display is started during the special state. , the player can be interested in the state when the lottery information is stopped and displayed, and the problem of early boredom with the game can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means executes the effect corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information when the special state is not set, and the effect executing means executes the effect corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information when the special state is set. The game machine H2 is characterized by switching to an effect corresponding to a dynamic display period of lottery information and executing it.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the dynamic display period corresponding to the special state and the non-special state is switched to execute the presentation, so that the player can be provided with different presentations. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means are: and storage means for storing the game ball, wherein the determination means selects a game ball from the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition. A gaming machine H3 characterized in that the information acquired based on the entry of a ball is preferentially executed for determination.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, when there is a plurality of information acquired based on the second ball entering means, the plurality of information is continuously determined. can do. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute determinations that are advantageous to the player, and the effect is that the player's desire to play can be improved.

In the gaming machine H3, the determination condition includes static display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, and the storage means stores the undetermined information. A game machine H4 characterized in that at least the following is set as a condition.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, it is difficult to satisfy the determination condition during the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that the player can be given an opportunity to store information in the means, and the game can be played efficiently.

In the game machine H4, when the special state is set, the regulation means for regulating that the information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entering means is stored in the storage means. A gaming machine H5 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4, when the special state is set, the information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entering means is restricted from being stored. Therefore, at the timing when the special state is set, the identification information for indicating the determination result based on the information obtained by entering the first ball into the first ball entering means can be easily dynamically displayed, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to delay the execution of such a determination, and the player's interest can be increased.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the variable member stops displaying the lottery information indicating the specific lottery result if the special state is set during the period of the lottery by the lottery means. The game machine H6 is characterized in that it is changed to the second state when the game machine H6 is changed to the second state.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, it is possible to change to the second state based on the setting state of the special state during the lottery period, which is advantageous for the player. This has the effect of making it easier to provide a comfortable state and increasing the interest of the player.

<Characteristic group I> (Yamato specifications)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. information acquiring means for acquiring information based on the above, and executing a first determination based on the information acquired by the information acquiring means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, Determining means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and its determining means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by means of dynamic display means; a normal state in which a game ball is more likely to enter said first ball entering means than said second ball entering means; and said second ball entering means is more likely than said first ball entering means. a state setting means capable of switching and setting at least a special state in which game balls are likely to enter the means, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, the special state is set. As release conditions for releasing the state, it is possible to individually set the dynamic display count of the identification information corresponding to the first determination and the dynamic display count of the identification information corresponding to the second determination. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game is executed, and a high-probability state is set in which the probability of lottery after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game, so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, patterns for informing the player of the lottery result are variably displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like, and thereafter, the pattern indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result. If it is a hit, it is known that a winning game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous due to the repetition of the variable display of symbols based on the lottery results, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine I1, the dynamic display count of the identification information corresponding to the first determination and the dynamic display count of the identification information corresponding to the second determination can be set as the conditions for canceling the special state. , the expectation for execution of the second determination can be varied and set. That is, if the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is set to be large, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to execute the second determination. If the number of times of dynamic display is set to a large number, it is possible to set a small number of opportunities for executing the second determination, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be varied.

The gaming machine I1 has storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means determines whether or not a ball is hit by the second ball-entering means out of the information stored in the storage means. The game machine I2 is characterized in that the information obtained by the information obtaining means is preferentially determined based on the above.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the determination is preferentially executed for the information for executing the determination that is advantageous to the player, so that the determination that is advantageous to the player is continuously performed. There is an effect that it can be easily played and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the special state is set, the storage means is provided with a restriction means for making it difficult to store information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A gaming machine I3 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, when a special state occurs, the identification information based on the first determination can be easily dynamically displayed, and the second input can be displayed during the dynamic display period. There is an effect that a game ball is entered into the ball means to store more information, and after the dynamic display of the first determination is completed, the advantageous determination can be easily executed continuously.

In any one of gaming machines I1 to I3, the release condition is such that the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is greater than the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination. A game machine I4 characterized in that it is

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, it is possible to suppress the cancellation of the special state by executing only the first determination that is disadvantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to facilitate the execution of the second determination that is advantageous to the player during the state.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming machine I5 is characterized in that the cancellation condition is set such that the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination is one.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4, the number of times the second determination advantageous to the player is executed during the special state can be limited to one. There is an effect that it can be suppressed that it is given to.

A gaming machine I6 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the storage means is configured to be able to store the information up to an upper limit number.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the information for executing the second determination advantageous to the player can be stored up to the upper limit number, so the special state ends. It is possible to execute the second determination even after the Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have expectations even after the special state ends.

In the gaming machine I6, the upper limit number is the first upper limit number for the information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A gaming machine I7 is characterized in that a second upper limit number is set for the information acquired based on the fact that the gaming machine I7.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I6, the information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means and the game ball entering the second ball entering means Since it is possible to set the maximum number of information that can be stored based on the information acquired based on the above, regardless of the number of stored information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means , the information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means can be stored up to the upper limit number. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can actively play the game so as to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entering means during the special state.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I7, a variable ball entry means for changing between a state in which a game ball can be entered and a state in which it is difficult to enter, and a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means are allowed to pass. A gaming machine I8, characterized in that it has a specific area, and the privilege giving means is configured to be able to give a privilege when a game ball passes through the specific area.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines I1 to I7, a privilege is given by passing the game ball through the specific area, so that the player is interested in the ball flow. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A game machine I9 characterized in that, in the game machine I8, the special state is set by the state setting means after the privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effects of the game machine I8, a special state is set after the award of the privilege, so that the playability can be enhanced by passing the game ball through the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine I9, the state setting means has setting determination means for determining whether or not to set the special state, and the setting determination means determines whether the first determination or the second determination is determined by the determination means. A gaming machine I10 characterized in that it determines whether or not to set the special state based on the execution.

According to the gaming machine I10, whether or not to set the special state after the privilege is granted is determined at the timing when the determination by the determination means is executed. Whether or not the special state is set is variable. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the timing for passing the game ball through the specific area.

A gaming machine I11 characterized in that the gaming machine I10 has suggesting means for suggesting the determination information determined by the setting determination means during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine I11, since it can be recognized by the suggesting means whether the special state is set after the award of the privilege, the game is played so as to pass the game ball through the specific area, or to the specific area. There is an effect that the player can determine whether or not to play the game so that the game ball does not pass through by referring to the content of the suggestion.

In any one of gaming machines I7 to I11, gaming machine I12 is characterized in that the number of times of dynamic display for the first identification information, which is greater than the first upper limit number, is set as the cancellation condition.

According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I7 to I11, when the transition to the special state occurs, the information already acquired for the ball entering the first ball entering means is the first ball entering means. Even when the upper limit number is stored, the special state is not canceled even if all the information is subjected to the first determination and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, so there is an opportunity to execute the second determination in the special state. It has the effect that it can be given by the player and can increase the value of the special status to the player.

<Feature J Group> (Jackpot production during continuous chan)
A first determination based on a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. and determining means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the identification information; a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entering means can be changed to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied; When the state is set, dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, a canceling means for canceling the special state, and the special state is canceled by the canceling means. Determination means for determining whether the special state is set by the state setting means before dynamic display of the identification information is started after cancellation, and based on the determination result of the determination means, A game machine J1 characterized by comprising an effect executing means capable of varying and executing an effect.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game is executed, and a high-probability state is set in which the probability of lottery after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game, so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, patterns for informing the player of the lottery result are variably displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like, and thereafter, the pattern indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result. If it is a hit, it is known that a winning game is executed and an effect is executed during the winning game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

According to the gaming machine J1, even when the special state is canceled, the effect is varied based on the information as to whether the special state is set again before the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to distinguish whether or not the special state is continuously set from the performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine J1, the effect executing means executes the effect in response to the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result based on the second determination.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result based on the second determination advantageous to the player is executed. has the effect of increasing expectations for the determination result of the second determination.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing a effect capable of identifying information based on the number of times the special state is continuously determined by the determining means. Gaming machine J3.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1 or J2, the number of times the special state is set continuously by the effect can be identified, so that the player can not only play the game but also set the special state. It is possible to make the player interested in the number of times the player has played the game, which has the effect of improving the amusement of the game.

In gaming machines J1 to J3, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, information for executing the first determination is acquired, and when the game ball enters the second ball entering means and information acquisition means for acquiring information for executing the second determination, and information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J1 to J3, information is acquired at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, and the information is stored in the information storage means. Since it is memorized, it is possible to save chances to be judged by the judging means, and there is an effect that many profits can be given to the player.

In the gaming machine J4, the effect execution means is configured to be able to vary the effect based on the number of pieces of the information for executing the second determination stored in the storage means. A gaming machine J5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J4, the presentation is varied depending on the number of pieces of information for executing the second determination that is advantageous to the player, so that the information easily reserved for the player. can be notified, and there is an effect that the interest in the performance can be increased.

<Characteristic group K>
A first determination based on a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. and dynamically displaying determination means for performing a second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means. and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. 2, the gaming machine K1 is characterized by comprising state setting means for setting a game state advantageous to the player during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed based on establishment of a specific condition.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board, and a pattern for showing the lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like. The pattern is displayed in a target manner, and the pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner in which the lottery result is notified at the timing when the dynamic display period ends. If the notification mode indicated by the pattern is winning, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and a high probability state is set to increase the lottery probability after the winning game according to the type of the winning game, and the winning game is continuously performed. It has been proposed that it is configured to be easy to implement. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the dynamic display period for showing the lottery result is long, the number of lotteries will be reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player. There was a problem that the player got bored with the game. To provide a game machine capable of suppressing the problem that a player gets bored with a game.

According to the game machine K1, the period during which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed is advantageous to the player, so that the player expects that the dynamic display with a long dynamic display period will be executed. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the determination means executes determination that the second determination is more advantageous to the player than the first determination. an information acquiring means for acquiring information for executing the first determination based on the above, and acquiring information for executing the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means; and storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination means stores the information in the storage means based on completion of the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine K2 characterized in that it executes determination on the information that is present.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, even if the information is acquired during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, it is stored in the storage means, so that the judgment means has more chances to judge. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine K1 or K2, a variable means for changing from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means to a second state in which a game ball can be entered, and establishment of a lottery condition. and lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means, wherein the state setting means is provided to the player. When the lottery information indicating a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed as an advantageous game state, the variable means can change the game state to the second state. A gaming machine K3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2, when the special state occurs, the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entering means, and the game characteristics can be varied, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. has the effect of increasing

In the gaming machine K3, when a game state advantageous to the player is set by the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, the The gaming machine K4 is characterized by having releasing means for releasing a game state advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3, it is advantageous to the player based on the completion of the dynamic display of the identification information executed when the game state advantageous to the player is set. Since the normal game state is canceled, the player can be interested in the end timing of the dynamic display of the identification information, and even if a long period of dynamic display is set, the problem of boredom of the player can be suppressed. has the effect of

Any one of the game machines K1 to K4 has a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down and a second flow path in which a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the first ball entering The means are arranged at the second flow path and at least a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can be entered, and the second ball entry means is arranged in the second flow path. A game machine K5 characterized in that it has a

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, even if a game is played to cause a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, the game ball will not enter the first ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the state in which only the judgment advantageous to the player is likely to be executed.

Any one of the game machines K1 to K5 has an effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information when a game state advantageous to the player is set. A gaming machine K6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, if a game state advantageous to the player is set, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period is executed. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

The game machine K6 is characterized in that the effect executed by the effect execution means includes an effect prompting the game ball to enter the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. A game machine K7.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, the game ball is entered into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means during a game state advantageous to the player, and the first determination or the second determination is made. Since it is possible to easily give an opportunity to execute the judgment, there is an effect that the game can be played efficiently.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game is executed, and a high-probability state is set in which the probability of lottery after the winning game is increased according to the type of the winning game, so that the winning game can be easily executed continuously. In such a game machine, patterns for informing the player of the lottery result are variably displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like, and thereafter, the pattern indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result. If it is a hit, it is known that a winning game is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with it.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and aims to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the problem that the player gets bored early.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 includes first ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means. Information acquiring means for acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball means or the second ball entering means, and based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means by the information acquiring means A first determination is executed based on the information acquired by the above, and based on the information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, the player is more affected than the first determination. determination means for executing a second determination that is advantageous; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means; a normal state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entering means than the second ball entering means; a state setting means capable of switching and setting at least a special state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entering means than the first ball entering means, and the state setting means When the special state is set by the above, as cancellation conditions for canceling the special state, the dynamic display count of the identification information corresponding to the first determination and the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the second determination and the number of times of target display can be individually set.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, further comprising storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and wherein the determination means is stored in the storage means. Among the information, the information acquired by the information acquiring means based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball entering means is preferentially determined.
In the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, when the special state is set, the storage means stores information indicating that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means. It has restricting means that makes it difficult for information acquired based on it to be stored.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the release condition is the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the first determination. is configured to be larger than the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to .
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means, the first ball-entering means or the Information acquiring means for acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and the information acquired by the information acquiring means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means A first determination is executed based on the information, and a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination is performed based on the information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. 2 determination means for executing determination, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped. a normal state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entering means than the second ball entering means; and the first entering means. and a state setting means capable of switching and setting at least a special state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entering means than the ball means, and the state setting means causes the special state. is set, the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the first determination and the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination are set as cancellation conditions for canceling the special state. can be set individually. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means determines whether the information stored in the storage means has been hit by the second ball hitting means. In this case, the information acquired by the information acquisition means is preferentially determined. Therefore, since the second determination that is advantageous to the player is preferentially executed, there is an effect that it is possible to continuously execute advantageous determinations.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the special state is set, it has a restriction means for making it difficult to store the information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means in the storage means. Therefore, when the special state is set, the first judgment can be easily executed before the second judgment, and there is an effect that the second ball entering means can enter the game ball during that time.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the cancellation condition is such that the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is larger than the number of dynamic display times of the identification information corresponding to the second determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the second determination is not performed due to the execution of the first determination.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a Left first entrance (first entrance means)
64b Right first entrance (first entrance means)
113 Audio lamp control device (effect start means)
640 Second entrance (second entrance means)
640a electric accessories (variable means)
S402 first determination means, second determination means S406 dynamic display means S712 storage means S1815 game state setting means

Claims (1)

a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball;
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means;
a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means;
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means;
a storage means capable of storing the information obtained by the obtaining means up to a predetermined number;
second determination means capable of executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means when a determination condition is satisfied;
dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, identification information for indicating the result of the first determination by the first determination means or the result of the second determination by the second determination means; ,
Bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game when the dynamic display means stop-displays the identification information for indicating the specific result of the first determination or the specific result of the second determination. and,
a variable means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entering means and a second state in which a game ball is easier to enter than in the first state;
A game in which a first game state and a second game state in which the variable means is variably controlled so that the game ball enters the second ball entering means more easily than in the first game state can be set. a state setting means;
a game machine comprising a production start means capable of starting a production based on the dynamic display of the identification information during the second game state,
Said game state setting means satisfies an end condition based on a first setting for setting said second game state after said privilege game is executed and said dynamic display of said identification information during said second game state. and a second setting for setting the first game state when
Said effect start means uses, as said effect, a effect period including at least a dynamic display period corresponding to said dynamic display in which said end condition can be satisfied, to suggest the end of said second game state. It is possible to start the production,
The privilege game execution means selects one privilege game from among a plurality of privilege games including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game as the privilege game. is executable and
The game machine is
When the privilege game has the right to be executed at a specific timing during the period in which the end -suggesting effect is being executed, the privilege game is performed as a mode of the effect to be executed after the specific timing. It is possible to determine a mode different from the mode of the production that is executed when the player does not have the right to be executed ,
The privilege game does not have the right to be executed at a specific timing during the period in which the end-suggesting effect is being executed, and then the privilege game is executed during the period in which the end-suggesting effect is being executed. If the player has the right to obtain the privilege game, the privilege game can be played in a specific mode different from the production mode determined when the privilege game has the right to be played at the specific timing. It is possible to inform the player that it has
The gaming machine is characterized in that, as the aspect of the presentation, it is possible to determine an aspect that allows the player to grasp that the second privilege game has the right to be executed.

Images